PF 700dp700js700df720fax Mensm

PF-700/710/PF-750 DP-700/JS-700 DF-720/DF-730 FaxSystem(M)
SERVICE MANUAL
Published in July 2006 3KH70760
CAUTION
DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY REPLACED. REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS.
ATTENTION
IL Y A DANGER DEXPLOSION SIL Y A REMPLACEMENT INCORRECT DE LA BATTERIE. REMPLACER UNIQUEMENT AVEC UNE BATTERIE DU MME TYPE OU DUN TYPE RECOMMAND PAR LE CONSTRUCTEUR. METTRE AU RBUT LES BATTERIES USAGES CONFORMMENT AUX INSTRUCTIONS DU FABRICANT.
Revision history
Revision Date Replaced pages Remarks
This page is intentionally left blank.
Safety precautions
This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of their customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions described here before engaging in maintenance activities.
Safety warnings and precautions

Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and to prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below:
DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol. WARNING: Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol. CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol.
Symbols The triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific point of attention is shown inside the symbol. General warning.
Warning of risk of electric shock.
Warning of high temperature.
indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol. General prohibited action.
Disassembly prohibited.
indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol. General action required.
Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.
Always ground the copier.
1.Installation Precautions
WARNING Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections to one outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always check that it is adequate for the rated current. ............................................................................................. Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the copier may cause fire or electric shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause explosion or electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes, lightning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the proper authorities. ............................................................................................................................ CAUTION:
Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over, causing injury. .......
Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock. ................ Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material.
This may cause fire. ......................................................................................................................... Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool as possible. Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance. ...........
Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. ............................................... Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped. Failure to do this may cause the copier to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury. ........................................................... Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer is accidentally ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention immediately. If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain medical attention. ...................................................................................................................................... Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copiers instruction handbook. .....................................................................................................................
2.Precautions for Maintenance

WARNING
Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly. ............... Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related brochures. ....................................................................................................................................... Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms and protective circuits. .....................................................................................................................
Always use parts having the correct specifications. .......................................................................... Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related brochure when replacing them. Using a piece of wire, for example, could lead to fire or other serious accident. .......................................................................................................................................... When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a part, always use the correct scale and measure carefully. ................................................................
Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection. ............. Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. If it is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock. ..............................................................
Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light may damage eyesight. ........................................................................................................................... Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may cause electric shock if handled improperly. ............................................................................................................ CAUTION Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they are safely secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections. ..........................................................
Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts. ........
Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot. .................................. Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean. Dirt on them can cause abnormally high temperatures. ........................................................................................................
Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement. .................... Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removing them; always hold the plug itself. ..................................................................................................... Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If necessary, protect it with a cable cover or other appropriate item. .............................................................................................
Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks. ........
Remove toner completely from electronic components. ...................................................................
Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged. .................................... After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors and wires that were removed, have been refitted correctly. Special attention should be paid to any forgotten connector, trapped wire and missing screws. ................................................................................................... Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction handbook are clean and not peeling. Replace with new ones if necessary. ......................................
Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below: ..................................... Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill. Wipe spills off completely. Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents. Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the power switch on. Always wash hands afterwards. Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to fire in a furnace, etc. ....................................................................................................................... Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power plug from the wall outlet immediately. ............................................................................................................................................
3.Miscellaneous
WARNING Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol, other than the specified refiner; it may generate toxic gas. .....................................................................................
PF-700 PF-710
3J4-1
CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 Specifications..........................................................................................................................................1-1-1 1-1-2 Parts names............................................................................................................................................1-1-2 1-1-3 Machine cross section ............................................................................................................................1-1-3
1-2 Installation
1-2-1 Installation environment ..........................................................................................................................1-2-1 1-2-2 Unpacking ...............................................................................................................................................1-2-2 1-2-3 Installing the cassette heater (option) .....................................................................................................1-2-3
1-3 Maintenance Mode

1-3-1 Maintenance mode (fullcolor machine) ...................................................................................................1-3-1 (1) Executing a maintenance item ..........................................................................................................1-3-1 (2) Contents of maintenance mode items...............................................................................................1-3-2 1-3-2 Maintenance mode (monochrome machine) ..........................................................................................1-3-3 (1) Executing a maintenance item ..........................................................................................................1-3-3 (2) Contents of maintenance mode items...............................................................................................1-3-4
1-4 Troubleshooting
1-4-1 Paper misfeed detection .........................................................................................................................1-4-1 (1) Paper misfeed indication ...................................................................................................................1-4-1 (2) Paper misfeed detection conditions ..................................................................................................1-4-1 (3) Paper misfeeds .................................................................................................................................1-4-2 1-4-2 Self-diagnosis .........................................................................................................................................1-4-4 (1) Self-diagnostic function .....................................................................................................................1-4-4 (2) Self diagnostic codes ........................................................................................................................1-4-4 1-4-3 Electric problems ....................................................................................................................................1-4-6 1-4-4 Mechanical problems ..............................................................................................................................1-4-8
1-5 Assembly and Disassembly

1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly............................................................................................1-5-1 (1) Precautions .......................................................................................................................................1-5-1 1-5-2 Paper feed section ..................................................................................................................................1-5-2 (1) Detaching and refitting the forwarding, paper feed and separation pulleys ......................................1-5-2 (2) Replacing paper feeder paper width switch 1, 2 ...............................................................................1-5-5 (3) Replacing paper feeder paper feed clutch 1/2 and paper feeder paper conveying clutch ................1-5-7 (4) Adjusting the position of the rack adjuster.........................................................................................1-5-9
2-1 Mechanical construction

2-1-1 Mechanical construction .........................................................................................................................2-1-1
2-2 Electrical Parts Layout

2-2-1 Electrical parts layout..............................................................................................................................2-2-1
2-3 Operation of the PWBs

2-3-1 Paper feeder main PWB .........................................................................................................................2-3-1
2-4 Appendixes
List of maintenance parts........................................................................................................................2-4-1 Periodic maintenance procedures ..........................................................................................................2-4-1 Wiring diagram........................................................................................................................................2-4-3
3J4
3J4
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1
Specifications
Paper supply method...................... Friction retard method (No. sheets: 500, 80 g/m2, 2 caddettes) Paper size....................................... A3 to A5R, folio, 11" x 17" to 5 1/2" x 8 1/2" Supported paper ............................. Weight: 60 to 105 g/m2 Types: standard, recycled, color Power source.................................. Electrically connected to the machine. Dimensions ..................................... 585 (W) x 590 (D) x 315 (H) mm 23 5/16" (W) x 23 1/4" (D) x 12 3/8" (H) Weight............................................. 26 kg/57.2 lbs
NOTE: These specifications are subject to change without notice.
1-1-1
3J4
1-1-2
Parts names
Figure 1-1-1 1. 2. 3. Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Left cover 3
1-1-2
3J4
1-1-3
Machine cross section
Paper path
Figure 1-1-2 Machine cross section
1-1-3
3J4
1-1-4
3J4
1-2 Installation
1-2-1
1.
Installation environment
Installation location (Be based on the machine establishment place.) Avoid direct sunlight or bright lighting. Ensure that the photo-conductor will not be exposed to direct sunlight or other strong light when removing paper jams. Avoid extremes of temperature and humidity, abrupt ambient temperature changes, and hot or cold air directed onto the machine. Avoid dust and vibration. Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine. Place the machine on a level surface (maximum allowance inclination: 1). Avoid air-borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photo-conductor, such as mercury, acidic of alkaline vapors, inorganic gasses, NOx, SOx gases and chlorine-based organic solvents. Select a room with good ventilation.
1-2-1
3J4
1-2-2
Unpacking
Figure 1-2-1 Unpacking 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Paper feeder Retainer CVM4 x 06 cross-head binding screws Pins Stays M4 x 10 TP screws Outer case Bottom pads 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. Upper pad Stays Machine cover Rear spacer Plastic bag Bar code label Plastic bag Installation guide
Caution: Place the machine on a level surface.
1-2-2
3J4
1-2-3
Installing the cassette heater (option)
Cassette heater installation requires the following parts: Cassette heater (P/N 302FB25060): for 220 to 240 V specifications only Cassette heater (P/N 302FB25050): for 120 V specifications only Two (2) M4 x 8 S tight screws (P/N B1304060) Procedure 1. Remove cassette 3 and 4. 2. Remove the three screws holding the paper feeder rear cover and then the cover. 3. Pass the cassette heater cable to the machine rear through the cable hole in the machine right. 4. Attach the cassette heater using the two M4 x 8 S tight screws.
M4 x 8 S tight screws Cable hole
Cassette heater
Figure 1-2-2
5. Insert the cassette heater connector into the connector of the main harness. 6. Tidy up the desk dehumidifier cable using the wire saddle and route the cable while clipping the wire saddles into the holes in the rear frame. 7. Refit the paper feeder rear cover. 8. Refit cassette 3 and 4.
Wire saddle
Cable of paper feeder
Cable of cassette heater
Figure 1-2-3
1-2-3
3J4
1-2-4
3J4-1
1-3-1
Maintenance mode (fullcolor machine)
The machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine. (1) Executing a maintenance item
Start
Enter 10871087 using the numeric keys.
Maintenance mode is entered.
Enter the maintenance item number using the cursor up/down keys or numeric keys.
The maintenance item is selected.
Press the start key.
The selected maintenance item is run.
Press the stop/clear key.
Yes
Repeat the same maintenance item?
No
Yes
Run another maintenance item?
No Enter 001 using the cursor up/down keys or numeric keys and press the start key.
Maintenance mode is exited.
End
1-3-1
3J4 (2) Contents of maintenance mode items Maintenance item No. U247 Description Checking the operation of paper feeder Description Turns on motors and clutches of paper feeder. Purpose To check the operation of motors and clutches of paper feed device. Method 1. Press the start key. Display DESK FEED CLUTCH FEED CLUTCH U CLUTCH L Motor and clutches Paper feeder drive motor (PFDM) Paper feeder feed clutch (PFFCL) Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1) Paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2)
2. Select the item to be operated. When selecting the motor, the operation starts. To stop the operation, select the item again. When selecting the clutch, each clutch is turned on for 1 s. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U901 Checking copy counts by paper feed locations Description Displays copy counts by paper feed locations. Purpose To check the time to replace consumable parts. Method 1. Press the start key. The counts by paper feed locations are displayed. Display BYPASS CASSETTE 1 CASSETTE 2 CASSETTE 3 CASSETTE 4 DUPLEX Description MP tray Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Duplex unit
Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-2
3J4-1
1-3-2
Maintenance mode (monochrome machine)
Start
Press the status key.
Press the stop key.
Yes
No
Yes
End
1-3-3
3J4-1 (2) Contents of maintenance mode items Maintenance item No. U247 Description Setting the paper feed device Description Turns on motors and clutches of paper feeder. Purpose To check the operation of motors and clutches of paper feed device. Method 1. Press the start key. Display DESK FEED CLUTCH FEED CLUTCH U CLUTCH L Motor and clutches Paper feeder drive motor (PFDM) Paper feeder feed clutch (PFFCL) Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1) Paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2)
2. Select the item to be operated. 3. Press the start key. The operation starts. 4. To stop operation, press the stop key. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U901 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper feed locations Description Displays or clears copy counts by paper feed locations. Purpose To check the time to replace consumable parts. Also to clear the counts after replacing the consumable parts. Method Press the start key. The counts by paper feed locations are displayed. Display MP TRAY CASSETTE 1 CASSETTE 2 CASSETTE 3 CASSETTE 4 LCF DUPLEX Paper feed locations MP tray Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Optional 3000-sheet paper feeder Duplex section
When an optional paper feed device is not installed, the corresponding count is not displayed. Clearing 1. Select the count to be cleared. To clear all counts, press the clear key. 2. Press the start key. The count is cleared. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-4
3J4
1-4 Troubleshooting
1-4-1
Paper misfeed detection
(1) Paper misfeed indication When a paper misfeed occurs, the machine immediately stops copying and displays the jam location on the operation panel. Paper misfeed detection can be reset by opening and closing the left cover 3 to turn left cover 3 switch off and on.
(2) Paper misfeed detection conditions
FSW3
PFPFCL1
PFFSW PFPFCL2
Figure 1-4-1
Section Paper feed section
Jam code 12 No paper feed from cassette 3
Conditions Feed switch 3 (FSW3) does not turn on within the specified time of paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1) turning on; the clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned back on, but the switch again fails to turn on within the specified time. The paper feeder feed switch (PFFSW) does not turn on within the specified time of paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2) turning on; the clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned back on, but the switch again fails to turn on within the specified time. Feed switch 3 (FSW3) does not turn off within specified time of its turning on. The paper feeder feed switch 1 (PFFSW) does not turn off within specified time of its turning on.
Specified time 1828 ms
13 No paper feed from cassette 4
1828 ms
24 Multiple sheets in cassette 3 paper feed section 25 Multiple sheets in cassette 4 paper feed section
3960 ms
3960 ms
1-4-1
3J4 (3) Paper misfeeds Problem (1) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (no paper feed from cassette 3). Jam code 12 Causes/check procedures Paper is extremely curled. Change the paper. Corrective measures
Check if the paper feed pul- Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys. ley, forwarding pulley and separation pulley of cassette 3 are deformed. Broken feed switch 3 actua- Check visually and replace switch. tor. Defective feed switch 3. Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 3 on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check (see page 1-4-6).
Check if paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 malfunctions. Electrical problem with paper feeder paper feed clutch 1. (2) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (no paper feed from cassette 4). Jam code 13 Paper is extremely curled.
Change the paper.
Check if the paper feed pul- Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys. ley, forwarding pulley and separation pulley of cassette 4 are deformed. Broken paper feeder feed switch actuator. Defective paper feeder feed switch. Check if paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 malfunctions. Electrical problem with paper feeder paper feed clutch 2. Check visually and replace switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feeder feed switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check (see page 1-4-6).
(3) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (multiple sheets in cassette 3). Jam code 24
Broken switch actuator. Defective feed switch 3.
Check visually and replace switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 1 on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check (see page 1-4-6).
Defective paper feeder paper feed clutch 1. Electrical problem with paper feeder paper feed clutch 1. Defective feed pulleys or feed rollers.
Check visually and replace.
1-4-2
3J4 Problem (4) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (multiple sheets in cassette 4). Jam code 25 Causes/check procedures Broken switch actuator. Defective paper feeder feed switch. Defective paper feeder paper feed clutch 2. Electrical problem with paper feeder paper feed clutch 2. Defective feed pulleys or feed rollers. Corrective measures Check visually and replace switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feeder feed switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check (see page 1-4-6).
1-4-3
3J4
1-4-2
Self-diagnosis
(1) Self-diagnostic function This unit is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, copying is disabled and the problem displayed as a code consisting of C followed by a number, indicating the nature of the problem. A message is also displayed requesting the user to call for service. After removing the problem, the self-diagnostic function can be reset by turning cover switch off and back on.
(2) Self diagnostic codes Remarks Code C0420 Contents Paper feeder communication error A communication error from paper feeder is detected 10 times in succession. Causes Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check procedures/corrective measures Check the connection of connector YC33 on the engine PWB and the connector YC1 on the paper feeder main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Replace the paper feeder main PWB or engine PWB and check for correct operation. Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Replace paper feeder lift motor 1.
Defective PWB.
C1030
Paper feeder lift motor 1 error When optional cassette 3 is inserted, paper feeder lift switch 1 does not turn on within 12 s of paper feeder lift motor 1 turning on. The lift overcurrent protective monitor signal is detected above 500 ms during driving the motor. However, the first 1 s after paper feeder lift motor 1 is turned on is excluded from detection.
Poor contact in the connector terminals.
Broken gears or couplings of paper feeder lift motor 1. Defective paper feeder lift motor 1. Defective paper feeder lift switch 1.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace paper feeder lift motor 1. Check if YC1-5 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low when paper feeder lift switch 1 is turned off. If not, replace paper feeder lift switch 1. Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Replace paper feeder lift motor 2.
C1040
Paper feeder lift motor 2 error When optional cassette 4 is inserted, paper feeder lift switch 2 does not turn on within 12 s of paper feeder lift motor 2 turning on. The lift overcurrent protective monitor signal is detected above 500 ms during driving the motor. However, the first 1 s after paper feeder lift motor 2 is turned on is excluded from detection.
Broken gears or couplings of paper feeder lift motor 2. Defective paper feeder lift motor 2. Defective paper feeder lift switch 2.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace paper feeder lift motor 2. Check if YC1-7 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low when paper feeder lift switch 2 is turned off. If not, replace paper feeder lift switch 2.
1-4-4
3J4 Remarks Code C1900 Contents Paper feeder EEPROM error When writing the data, the write data and the read data is not continuously in agreement three times. Causes Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check procedures/corrective measures Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation. Replace the paper feeder with another unit and check the operation. If the operation is normal, replace or repair paper feeder.
Defective engine PWB. Defective paper feeder.
1-4-5
3J4
1-4-3
Electric problems
Problem Causes Poor contact in the connector terminals. Defective left cover 3 switch. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Broken the gear. Defective paper feeder drive motor. Defective paper feeder main PWB. Check procedures/corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check for continuity across the contacts. If none, replace the left cover 3 switch. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check visually and replace the gear if necessary. Run maintenance item U247 and check if the paper feeder paper conveying motor operates when YC4-3 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low. If not, replace the paper feeder drive motor. Run maintenance item U247 and check if YC4-3 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low. If not, replace the paper feeder main PWB. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the clutch. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Run maintenance item U247 and check if following terminals on the paper feeder main PWB goes low. If not, replace the paper feeder main PWB. Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1: YC1-14 Paper feeder paper feed clutch 2: YC1-13 Paper feeder paper conveying clutch: YC2-1 Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the motor. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check if YC3-7 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low when the paper feeder paper length switch 1 is turned on. If not, replace the paper feeder paper length switch 1. Check for continuity between YC3-9 and YC3-1, YC3-2, and YC33 on the paper feeder main PWB. If the continuity is unaffected by movement of the width guides in the cassette 3 (i.e. either remains present or remains absent), then replace the paper feeder paper width switch 1. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check if YC3-8 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low when the paper feeder paper length switch 2 is turned on. If not, replace the paper feeder paper length switch 2. Check for continuity between YC3-10 and YC3-4, YC3-5, and YC3-6 on the paper feeder main PWB. If the continuity is unaffected by movement of the width guides in the cassette 4 (i.e. either remains present or remains absent), then replace the paper feeder paper width switch 2.
(1) The paper feeder does not operate when the main power switch is turned on. (2) The paper feeder drive motor does not operate.
(3) The paper feeder paper feed clutch 1/2 or paper feeder paper conveying clutch does not operate.
Broken clutch coil. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Defective paper feeder main PWB.
(4) The paper feeder lift motor 1/2 does not operate. (5) The size of paper on the cassette 3 is not displayed correctly.
Broken motor coil. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Defective paper feeder paper length switch 1. Defective paper feeder paper width switch 1.
(6) The size of paper on the cassette 4 is not displayed correctly.
Poor contact in the connector terminals. Defective paper feeder paper length switch 2. Defective paper feeder paper width switch 2.
1-4-6
3J4 Problem (7) The message requesting covers to be closed is displayed when the left cover 3 is closed. (8) Others. Causes Poor contact of the left cover 3 switch connector terminals. Defective left cover 3 switch. Wiring is broken, shorted or makes poor contact. Check procedures/corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check for continuity across the contacts. If there is no continuity when the left cover 3 switch is on, replace it. Check for continuity. If none, repair.
1-4-7
3J4
1-4-4
Mechanical problems
Problem Causes/check procedures Check if the surfaces of the following rollers and pulleys are dirty with paper powder: forwarding pulley, paper feed pulley, separation pulley, feed roller and feed pulley. Check if the paper feed pulley or separation pulley is deformed. Check if the forwarding pulley is deformed. Electrical problem with the following electromagnetic clutches: paper feeder paper feed clutches 1/2 and paper feeder paper conveying clutch. Corrective measures Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
(1) No primary paper feed.
Replace (see page 1-5-2). Replace (see page 1-5-2). See page 1-4-6.
(2) Skewed paper feed.
Width guide in the cassette installed incorrectly. Deformed width guide in the cassette.
Check the width guide visually and remedy or replace if necessary. Check the width guide visually and remedy or replace if it is deformed. Replace the separation pulley if it is worn (see page 1-5-2). Change the paper. Change the paper. Check visually and remedy or replace any deformed guides. Grease the bushings and gears. Remedy.
(3) Multiple sheets of paper are fed at one time. (4) Paper jams.
Check if the separation pulley is deformed. Check if the paper is curled. Check if the paper is excessively curled. Deformed guides along the paper conveying path.
(5) Check if the pulleys, rollers and gears operate Abnormal noise is heard. smoothly. Check if the paper feeder paper feed clutches 1/2 and the aper feeder paper conveying clutch are installed correctly.
1-4-8
3J4
1-5-1
Precautions for assembly and disassembly
(1) Precautions Before starting disassembly, press the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the Power lamp is off before turning off the main power switch. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet. Turning off the main power switch before pressing the Power key to off may cause damage to the equipped hard disk. When handling PWBs (printed wiring boards), do not touch parts with bare hands. The PWBs are susceptible to static charge. Do not touch any PWB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge. When replacing battery on a PWB, dispose properly according to laws and regulations.
1-5-1
3J4
1-5-2
Paper feed section
(1) Detaching and refitting the forwarding, paper feed and separation pulleys Replace the forwarding, paper feed and separation pulleys as follows. Procedure Removing the primary paper feed units 1. Remove cassette 3 and 4. 2. Remove the two screws holding the lower front cover and then the cover. 3. Remove the one screw from each of the primary paper feed units and then the units.
Primary paper feed unit Screws
Figure 1-5-1
Removing the forwarding pulley 4. Remove the stopper and spring from the primary paper feed unit. 5. Raise the forwarding pulley retainer in the direction the arrow, and remove from the primary paper feed unit.
Forwarding pulley retainer
Stopper
Spring
Figure 1-5-2
1-5-2
3J4
6. Remove the stop ring from the forwarding pulley retainer. Remove the forwarding pulley from the forwarding shaft.
Forwarding shaft
Forwarding pulley retainer
Stop ring
Forwarding pulley
Figure 1-5-3 Removing the paper feed pulley 7. Remove two stop rings. 8. Pull the paper feed shaft toward the rear of the primary paper feed unit (in the direction of the arrow) and remove the paper feed pulley and gear.
Stop rings
Paper feed shaft
Gear
Paper feed pulley
Figure 1-5-4 Removing the separation pulley 9. Remove the stop ring from the rear of the primary paper feed unit. 10. Pull the separation shaft toward the rear of the machine (in the direction of the arrow) and remove the separation pulley.
Stop ring Separation shaft Separation pulley
Figure 1-5-5
1-5-3
3J4
11. Replace the forwarding, paper feed and separation pulleys. 12. Refit all removed parts. Cautions: When fitting the forwarding pulley, orient it correctly as shown in figure 1-5-6. When fitting the paper feed pulley and gear, keep the blue end of the paper feed pulley and the black end of the gear toward the machine rear.
Machine front
Machine rear
Forwarding pulley
Figure 1-5-6
1-5-4
3J4 (2) Replacing paper feeder paper width switch 1, 2 Replace paper feeder paper width switch 1 and 2 as follows. Caution: After replacing paper feeder paper width switch, be sure to perform (4) Adjusting the position of the rack adjuster. Procedure 1. Remove the cassette. 2. Remove two screws and 8-pin socket from the rear of the drawer. 3. Detach the 8-pin connector from the 8-pin socket. 4. Remove the three screws holding the rack adjuster. 5. While raising the cassette lift in the direction of the arrow, remove the rack adjuster.
Screws Rack adjuster
8-pin socket
Cassette lift
Screws 8-pin connector
Figure 1-5-7
6. Remove two screws from the back of the rack adjuster and then the paper feeder paper width switch.
Screws
Paper feeder paper width switch
Figure 1-5-8
1-5-5
3J4 7. Apply the specified grease to the printed surface of the new paper feeder paper width switch (shaded area in the diagram) and fit the switch to the rack adjuster.
Apply the specified grease.
Figure 1-5-9 8. Refit all removed parts.
1-5-6
3J4 (3) Replacing paper feeder paper feed clutch 1/2 and paper feeder paper conveying clutch Replace paper feeder paper feed clutch 1/2 and paper feeder paper conveying clutch as follows. Procedure 1. Remove the three screws holding the paper feeder rear cover and then the cover. 2. Remove the cable from the retainer clamp. 3. Remove the three screws holding the retainer and then the retainer. 4. Remove the two screws holding the rear cover left retainer and then the retainer.
Clamp
Retainer
Screws
Screws Rear cover left retainer
Figure 1-5-10
5. Remove stop rings and bearings from paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 and 2. 6. Remove the stop ring from the paper feeder paper conveying clutch.
Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 Stop ring and bearing
Paper feeder paper conveying clutch Stop ring
Paper feeder paper feed clutch 2
Stop ring and bearing
Figure 1-5-11
1-5-7
3J4
7. Remove the three screws holding the paper feeder drive motor retainer and then the retainer.
Paper feeder drive motor retainer
Screws
Figure 1-5-12
8. Remove the connectors and then the clutches.
Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1
Connector
Paper feeder paper conveying clutch Connector
Paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 Connector
Figure 1-5-13 9. Replace the clutches. 10. Refit all removed parts. Caution: When fitting the clutches, be sure to refit the whirl-stops.
1-5-8
3J4 (4) Adjusting the position of the rack adjuster Perform the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and the original on the paper fed from the cassette. Procedure
Start
Enter maintenance mode.
Enter 034 using cursor up/down keys or numeric key and press the start key.
Correct image
Output example 1
Output example 2
Figure 1-5-14
Select [Center Adjust] and then select [Center (Feed 3)].
Press the interrupt key to output the test pattern.
Is the image correct? <Reference value> Deviation to the left or right: 1.5 mm or less Yes Exit maintenance mode.
No
Loosen the three screws securing the rack adjuster and change the position of the adjuster. If the test pattern output example looks like 1, turn the adjusting screw clockwise, move the adjuster in the direction of the black arrow ( ). If the test pattern output example looks like 2, turn the adjusting screw counterclockwise, move the adjuster in the direction of the white arrow ( ). Retighten the three screws securing the rack adjuster.
End
Screws
Adjusting screw
Rack adjuster
Figure 1-5-15 Adjusting the position of the rack adjuster
1-5-9
3J4
1-5-10
3J4
2-1-1
Mechanical construction
The paper feeder feeds paper from either of its two cassettes to the machine. When paper is fed from cassette 3 of the paper feeder, the paper feeder paper conveying clutch (PFCCL) is operated to rotate the feed roller and pulley to carry the paper into the machine.
Figure 2-1-1 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) Forwarding pulley Paper feed pulley Separation pulley Feed roller Feed pulley Cassette lift Lift operating plate Upper feed guide Middle feed guide Lower feed guide Feed guide Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1) (13) Paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2) (14) Paper feeder paper conveying clutch (PFCCL) (15) Paper feeder paper switch 1 (PFPSW1) (16) Paper feeder paper switch 2 (PFPSW2) (17) Paper feeder feed switch (PFFSW) (18) Paper feeder lift switch 1 (PFLSW1) (19) Paper feeder lift switch 2 (PFLSW2) (20) Paper feeder paper length switch 1 (PFPLSW1) (21) Paper feeder paper length switch 2 (PFPLSW2) (22) Paper feeder paper width switch 1 (PFPWSW1) (23) Paper feeder paper width switch 2 (PFPWSW2)
2-1-1
3J4
PFPSW1 PFPFCL1
PFLSW1
PFMPWB YC1-5 YC1-6 YC1-14
PFCCL PFPSW2 PFFSW PFPFCL2 PFLSW2
YC2-1 YC1-7 YC1-8 YC1-13
YC2-7
Figure 2-1-2
2-1-2
3J4
2-2-1
Electrical parts layout

15 3 5
17 2 11
12
13 7 9 1
16 4 6 14 8 10 18
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-1 Layout of electrical parts 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. Paper feeder main PWB (PFMPWB) ........... Controls electrical parts. Left cover 3 switch (LC3SW) ....................... Breaks the safety circuit when left cover 3 is opened, and resets paper jam detection. Paper feeder paper switch 1 (PFPSW1) ...... Detects the presence of paper in cassette 3. Paper feeder paper switch 2 (PFPSW2) ...... Detects the presence of paper in cassette 4. Paper feeder lift switch 1 (PFLSW1) ............ Detects the cassette lift of cassette 3 reaching the upper limit. Paper feeder lift switch 2 (PFLSW2) ............ Detects the cassette lift of cassette 4 reaching the upper limit. Paper feeder paper length switch 1 (PFPLSW1).................................................. Detects the length of paper in cassette 3. Paper feeder paper length switch 2 (PFPLSW2).................................................. Detects the length of paper in cassette 4. Paper feeder paper width switch 1 (PFPWSW1) ................................................ Detects the width of paper in cassette 3. Paper feeder paper width switch 2 (PFPWSW2) ................................................ Detects the width of paper in cassette 4. Paper feeder feed switch (PFFSW) ............. Controls paper feeder paper feed clutch 2. Paper feeder drive motor (PFDM)................ Drives the paper feeder. Paper feeder lift motor 1 (PFLM1) ............... Drives the cassette lift of cassette 3. Paper feeder lift motor 2 (PFLM2) ............... Drives the cassette lift of cassette 4. Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1)................................................... Primary paper feed from cassette 3. Paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2)................................................... Primary paper feed from cassette 4. Paper feeder paper conveying clutch (PFCCL)....................................................... Conveys paper to the machine. Paper feeder cassette heater* (PFCH) ........ Dehumidifies paper.
*Optional.
2-2-1
3J4
2-2-2
3J4
2-3-1
Paper feeder main PWB
PFMPWB PFDM LC3SW
PFLM1 PFLM2
PFFSW
CPU (U1) PFPFCL1 PFPFCL2 PFCCL From the machine
PFPSW1 PFPSW2 PFLSW1 PFLSW2 PFPLSW1 PFPLSW2 PFPWSW1 PFPWSW2
Figure 2-3-1 Paper feeder main PWB diagram
2-3-1
3J4
1 2 YC1 15 16 1 YC5 10 1 YC2 17 18 1 2 YC3 11 12 1 7 1 YC4 YC6 3 2
Figure 2-3-2 Paper feeder main PWB silk-screen diagram
2-3-2
3J4 Connector YC1 Connected to the paper feeder paper switch 1/2, paper feeder lift switch 1/ 2 and paper feeder paper feed clutch 1/2 Pin No. Signal 1 5V 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 YC2 Connected to the paper feeder paper conveying clutch, paper feeder feed switch and paper feeder lift motor 1/2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 5V 5V 5V UCLLSW UCPESW LCLLSW LCPESW SGND SGND SGND SGND LFCL REM UFCL REM 24VR 24VR FCL REM 24VR PGND LLM REM PGND ULM REM LFEED SW 5V SGND NC NC NC SGND SGND UP SIG1 LO SIG1 UP SIG2 LO SIG2 I/O O O O O I I I I I I O O I O I I I O I I I I Voltage 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5/0 V DC 0/5 V DC 5/0 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC ??? ??? ??? ??? Description 5 V DC supply for PFLSW1 5 V DC supply for PFPSW1 5 V DC supply for PFLSW2 5 V DC supply for PFPSW2 PFLSW1: On/Off PFPSW1: On/Off PFLSW2: On/Off PFPSW2: On/Off Ground Ground Ground Ground PFPFCL2: On/Off PFPFCL1: On/Off 24 V DC supply for PFPFCL1 24 V DC supply for PFPFCL2 PFCCL: On/Off 24 V DC supply for PFCCL Ground PFLM2: On/Off Ground PFLM1: On/Off PFFSW: On/Off 5 V DC supply for PFFSW Ground Not used Not used Not used Ground Ground PFPSW1: On/Off PFPSW2: On/Off PFPSW1: On/Off PFPSW2: On/Off
2-3-3
3J4 Connector YC3 Connected to the paper feeder paper length switch 1/2 and paper feeder paper width switch 1/2 Pin No. Signal 1 UP DIG0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 YC4 Connected to the paper feeder drive motor 1 2 3 4 5 YC5 Connected to the machine 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 YC6 Connected to the left cover 3 switch 1 2 3 UP DIG1 UP DIG2 LO DIG0 LO DIG1 LO DIG2 UPCLE SW LOCLE SW SGND SGND SGND SGND 24VR PGND ON LOCK CLOCK UFEED SW READY SDI SDO SCLK 5V SGND PGND SEL 24V 24VR NC 24V I O 24 V DC/0V 24 V DC LC3SW: On/Off Not used 24 V DC supply for LC3SW Ground Ground I/O I I I I I I I I O O I O Voltage 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC 24 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC (pulse) Description PFPWSW1: On/Off PFPWSW1: On/Off PFPWSW1: On/Off PFPWSW2: On/Off PFPWSW2: On/Off PFPWSW2: On/Off PFPLSW1: On/Off PFPLSW2: On/Off Ground Ground Ground Ground 24 V DC supply for PFDM Ground PFDM: On/Off PFDM lock signal PFDM clock signal
2-3-4
3J4
2-4 Appendixes
List of maintenance parts

Maintenance part name Name used in service manual Feed roller Feed pulley Paper feed pulley Separation pulley Forwarding pulley Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 Paper feeder paper conveying clutch Name used in parts list ROLLER,VERTICAL CONVEYING RIGHT PULLEY,FEED PULLEY,PAPER FEED PULLEY,SEPARATION PULLEY FEED A CLUTCH,FEED 32 CLUTCH,FEED 32 CLUTCH,FEED 32 Part No. 302AR07421 33906660 2AR07220 2AR07230 2BJ06010 303J444020 303J444020 303J444020 Alternative part No. 2AR07421 3J444020 3J444020 3J444020 Fig. No. 6 4,5 4,5 4,5 4,5 6 6 6 Ref. No. 10 36 2 3 5 9 9 9
Periodic maintenance procedures

Section Paper conveying section Maintenance part/location Push paper sensor Surface view sensor Upper cover sensor Paper conveying sensor Adjusting hone position sensor Exit sensor Tray upper limit sensor Tray lower limit sensor Reverse sensor Exit roller Paper conveying belt Paper conveying roller Paddle Front static eliminator Rear static eliminator Reverse static eliminator Push paper lever cushion Method Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Check Check Check Cleaning Maintenance cycle Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Points and cautions Air brush Air brush Air brush Air brush Air brush Air brush Air brush Air brush Air brush Wipe with cloth moistened with alcohol. Wipe with cloth moistened with alcohol. Wipe with cloth moistened with alcohol. Wipe with cloth moistened with alcohol. If paper powder or dust adheres to tip of brush, remove it. If paper powder or dust adheres to tip of brush, remove it. If paper powder or dust adheres to tip of brush, remove it. Wipe with cloth moistened with alcohol. Page
2-4-1
3J4
2-4-2
3J4
Wiring diagram
PFPWSW1
4 3 2 1 5
4 3 2 1 5
1 2 5 6 7 8 4 3 3 2 1 PFPLSW1 1 2 3 2 1 1 2 5 6 7 8 4 3 3 2 1 PFPLSW2 1 2 3 2 1 2 1 2 1
7 8 3 4 1 2 6 5
PFMPWB
1 2 3 9 YC3 1 UP DIG0 2 UP DIG1 3 UP DIG2 9 SGND YC2 FCL REM 24VR 1 2 10 11 12 17 13 15 5 6 1 2 10 11 12 17 13 15 5 6 3 2 1 1 2 3 PFCCL
PFPFCL1
UP SIG2 SGND UP SIG1 PGND ULM REM 7 11 7 8 3 4 1 2 6 5 7 UPCLE SW 11 SGND LO SIG2 SGND LO SIG1 PGND LLM REM LFEED SW 5V SGND
5 4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
PFLM1
PFPWSW2
4 3 2 1 5
4 3 2 1 5
4 5 6 10
4 5 6 10
LO DIG0 LO DIG1 LO DIG2 SGND
18 14 16 3 4 7 8 9
18 14 16 3 4 7 8 9 3 2 1 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1 PFFSW
PFLM2
PFPFCL2
8 12 16 14 15 13 2 6 10 1 5 9
7 UPCLE SW 11 SGND YC1 16 24VR 14 UFCL REM 15 24VR 13 LFCL REM 2 5V 6 UCPESW 10 SGND 1 5V 5 UCLLSW 9 SGND YC6 24VR 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
PFPSW1
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
PFLSW1
2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7 2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
LC3SW Machine
PFPSW2
PFLSW2
4 8 12 3 7 11 1 2 3 4 5
4 8 12 3 7 11
5V LCPESW SGND 5V LCLLSW SGND
24V YC5 UFEED SW READY SDI SDO SCLK 5V SGND PGND SEL 24V
PFDM
YC4 1 24VR 2 PGND 3 ON 4 LOCK 5 CLOCK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 10 9 8 7 5 4 3 2 1
11 10 9 8 7 5 4 3 2 1
UFEED SW READY SDI SDO SCLK SEL 5V SGND PGND 24V
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1
UFEED SW READY SDI SDO SCLK SEL 5V SGND PGND 24V
PFCH
1 2
1 2
12 6
12 AC(L) 6 AC(N)
1 AC(L) 3 AC(N)
2-4-3
PF-750
5H0-1
CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications
1-2 Installation
1-2-1 Installation environment ..........................................................................................................................1-2-1 1-2-2 Unpacking ...............................................................................................................................................1-2-2 1-2-3 Installing the cassette heaters (option) ...................................................................................................1-2-3

1-4 Troubleshooting

1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly............................................................................................1-5-1 (1) Precautions .......................................................................................................................................1-5-1 1-5-2 Paper feed section ..................................................................................................................................1-5-2 (1) Detaching and refitting paper feeder separation roller 1 and 2 .........................................................1-5-2 (2) Detaching and refitting the paper feeder paper conveying unit assembly.........................................1-5-3 (3) Detaching and refitting paper feeder paper feed rollers 1 and 2 .......................................................1-5-3 (4) Adjusting the position of the center adjuster (center line alignment).................................................1-5-4


2-2-1 Electrical parts layout..............................................................................................................................2-2-1 (1) PWBs ................................................................................................................................................2-2-1 (2) Switches and sensors .......................................................................................................................2-2-2 (3) Other electrical components..............................................................................................................2-2-3

2-3-1 Paper feeder main PWB .........................................................................................................................2-3-1
2-4 Appendixes
5H0
5H0
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1
Specifications
Paper supply method...................... Friction retard method (No. sheets: 3000, 80 g/m2) Paper size....................................... 11" x 8 1/2", A4 Supported paper ............................. Weight: 60 - 105 g/m2 Types: standard, recycled, color Power source.................................. Electrically connected to the machine Dimensions ..................................... 23 5/16" (W) x 23 5/8" (D) x 12 3/8" (H) 585 (W) x 600 (D) x 314 (H)mm Weight............................................. Approx. 50.6 lbs. / Approx. 23 kg
1-1-1
5H0
1-1-2
Parts names
Figure 1-1-1 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Lifts Left cover 3 Cassette 3 Cassette front cover Front and rear lateral size adjusters
1-1-2
5H0
1-1-3
Paper path
1-1-3
5H0
1-1-4
5H0
1-2 Installation
1-2-1
1.
1-2-1
5H0
1-2-2
Unpacking
Figure 1-2-1 Unpacking 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 3000-sheet paper feeder Outer case Lower front pad Lower rear pad Support Upper pad Stay Retainer 9. Pins 10. CVM4 x 06 cross-head binding screws 11. M4 x 16 TP screws 12. Machine cover 13. Plastic bag 14. Plastic bag
1-2-2
5H0
1-2-3
Installing the cassette heaters (option)
Cassette heater installation requires the following parts: Two (2) cassette heaters (P/N xxxxxxxxxx): for 220 - 240 V specifications only Two (2) cassette heaters (P/N xxxxxxxxxx): for 120 V specifications only Two (2) cassette heater retainers (P/N 5A707690) Six (6) M4 x 6 IT tap-tight (S-tight) screws (P/N 37611570) Relay wire (P/N 5A707890) Ten (10) wire saddles (P/N M2109000) Procedure 1. Remove two screws from each of the right cover and left cover 3 and then the covers. 2. Remove three screws holding the paper feeder rear cover and then the cover. 3. Open the paper feeder. 4. Remove two screws holding the paper conveying unit assembly and then the assembly.
Screw
Paper conveying unit assembly
Screw
Figure 1-2-2
5. Fit the cassette heaters to the cassette heater retainers using two screws and wire saddle for each. 6. Fit the cassette heater retainers to the left and right of the paper feeder using one screw for each.
Cassette heater Screws Screws Cassette heater
Wire saddle Cassette heater retainer Machine left
Wire saddle Cassette heater retainer Machine right
Figure 1-2-3 7. Pull the cassette heater cable out to the machine rear through the cable hole.
1-2-3
5H0
8. Detach the open connector from the connector of the main harness on the machine rear.
Open connector
Figure 1-2-4
9. Insert the cassette heater connectors into the relay wire connectors. 10. Insert the main harness connector into the relay wire connector. 11. Tidy up the cassette heater cable and relay wire using eight wire saddles and route the cable and wire while clipping the wire saddles into the holes in the rear frame. 12. Refit the paper feeder rear cover. 13. Refit the right cover and left cover 3.
Wire saddle
Wire saddles
Wire saddles
Relay wire
Wire saddles
Figure 1-2-5
1-2-4
5H0-1
1-3-1
Start
Yes
No
Yes
End
1-3-1
5H0 (2) Contents of maintenance mode items Maintenance item No. U208 Description Setting the paper size for the paper feeder Description Sets the size of paper used in 3000-sheet paper feeder. Purpose To change the setting when the size of paper used in the paper feeder is changed. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the paper size (A4, B5 or 11 x 8.5). Initial setting: 11 x 8.5 (Inch specifications) A4 (Metric specifications) 3. Press the start key. The setting is set. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Checking the operation of 3000-sheet paper feeder Description Turns on motors and clutches of 3000-sheet paper feeder. Purpose To check the operation of motors and clutches of paper feed device. Method 1. Press the start key.. Display LCF FEED CLUTCH B CLUTCH P1 CLUTCH P2 Motor and clutches Paper feeder conveying motor (PFCM) Paper feeder conveying clutch (PFCCL) Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1) Paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2)
U247
2. Select the item to be operated. When selecting the motor, the operation starts. To stop the operation, select the item again. When selecting the clutch, each clutch is turned on for 1 s. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U901 Checking copy counts by paper feed locations Description Displays copy counts by paper feed locations. Purpose To check the time to replace consumable parts. Method 1. Press the start key. The counts by paper feed locations are displayed. Display BYPASS CASSETTE 1 CASSETTE 2 CASSETTE 3 CASSETTE 4 DUPLEX Description MP tray Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 (3000-sheet paper feeder) Duplex unit
When an optional paper feed device is not installed, the corresponding count is not displayed. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-2
5H0-1
1-3-2
Start
Press the stop key.
Yes
No
Yes
End
1-3-3
5H0-1 (2) Contents of maintenance mode items Maintenance item No. U208 Description Setting the paper size for the paper feeder Description Sets the size of paper used in optional 3000-sheet paper feeder. Purpose To change the setting when the size of paper used in the paper feeder is changed. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the paper size (A4, B5 or Letter). Initial setting: Letter (Inch specifications)/A4 (Metric specifications) 3. Press the start key. The setting is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Setting the paper feed device Description Turns on motors and clutches of 3000-sheet paper feeder. Purpose To check the operation of motors and clutches of paper feed device. Method 1. Press the start key.r Display LCF FEED CLUTCH B CLUTCH P1 CLUTCH P2 Motor and clutches Paper feeder conveying motor (PFCM) Paper feeder conveying clutch (PFCCL) Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1) Paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2)
U247
2. Select the item to be operated. 3. Press the start key. The operation starts. 4. To stop operation, press the stop key. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U901 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper feed locations Description Displays or clears copy counts by paper feed locations. Purpose To check the time to replace consumable parts. Also to clear the counts after replacing the consumable parts. Method Press the start key. The counts by paper feed locations are displayed. Display MP TRAY CASSETTE 1 CASSETTE 2 CASSETTE 3 CASSETTE 4 LCF DUPLEX Paper feed locations MP tray Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Optional cassette 3 Optional cassette 4 3000-sheet paper feeder Duplex section
When an optional paper feed device is not installed, the corresponding count is not displayed. Clearing 1. Select the count to be cleared. To clear all counts, press the clear key. 2. Press the start key. The count is cleared. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-4
5H0
1-4 Troubleshooting
1-4-1
(1) Paper misfeed indication When a paper misfeed occurs, the machine immediately stops copying and displays the jam location on the operation panel. Paper misfeed detection can be reset by opening and closing the left cover 3 to turn left cover 3 switch off and on.
FSW3 PPSENS1
PFPFCL1 PPSENS3 PFPFCL2
PPSENS2
Figure 1-4-1
Section Paper feed section
Jam code 12 No paper feed from cassette 3
Conditions Feed switch 3 (FSW3) does not turn on within the specified time of paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1) turning on; the clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned back on, but the switch again fails to turn on within the specified time.
Specified time 2393 ms
15 Jam in paper feeder horizontal paper conveying section 1 16 Jam in paper feeder horizontal paper conveying section 2 17 Jam in paper feeder horizontal paper conveying section 3 19 Misfeed in paper feeder paper conveying section 24 Multiple sheets in cassette 3 paper feed section 09 Paper feeder sequence error
Paper path sensor 3 (PPSENS3) does not turn on within spec- 963 ms ified time of paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2) turning on. Paper path sensor 2 (PPSENS2) does not turn on within spec- 1029 ms ified time of the paper path sensor 3 (PPSENS3) turning on .
Paper path sensor 1 (PPSENS1) does not turn on within spec- 631 ms ified time of the paper path sensor 2 (PPSENS2) turning on .
Feed switch 3 (FSW3) does not turn on within specified time of paper feeder feed switch (PFFSW) turning on. Feed switch 3 (FSW3) does not turn off within specified time of its turning on. Sequence error is occurred between the machine and paper feeder.
1842 ms
1867 ms
1-4-1
5H0 (3) Paper misfeeds Problem (1) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (no paper feed from cassette 3). Jam code 12 Causes/check procedures Paper is extremely curled. Change the paper. Corrective measures
Broken feed switch 3 actua- Check visually and replace switch. tor. Defective feed switch 3. Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 3 on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Check if the clutch malfunc- Run maintenance item U247 and select following clutch on the tions. touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1/2, paper feeder paper conveying clutch Electrical problem with clutch. Check (see page 1-4-6). Change the paper. Check visually and replace. With 5 V DC present at CN6-12 on the paper feeder main PWB, check if CN6-11 on the paper feeder main PWB remains low when paper path sensor 3 is turned on and off. If it does, replace paper path sensor 3. Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check (see page 1-4-6).
(2) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (jam in 3000sheet paper feeder horizontal paper conveying section). Jam code 15
Paper is extremely curled. Check if the paper side guides are deformed. Defective paper path sensor 3.
Check if paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 malfunctions. Electrical problem with paper feeder paper feed clutch 2.
(3) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (jam in 3000sheet paper feeder horizontal paper conveying section). Jam code 16
Paper is extremely curled. Check if the paper side guides are deformed. Defective paper path sensor 2.
Change the paper. Check visually and replace. With 5 V DC present at CN6-9 on the paper feeder main PWB, check if CN6-8 on the paper feeder main PWB remains low when paper path sensor 2 is turned on and off. If it does, replace paper path sensor 2. Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check (see page 1-4-6).
Check if paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 malfunctions. Electrical problem with paper feeder paper feed clutch 1.
1-4-2
5H0 Problem (4) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (jam in 3000sheet paper feeder horizontal paper conveying section). Jam code 17 Causes/check procedures Check if the paper side guides are deformed. Defective paper path sensor 1. Corrective measures Check visually and replace. With 5 V DC present at CN6-6 on the paper feeder main PWB, check if CN6-5 on the paper feeder main PWB remains low when paper path sensor 1 is turned on and off. If it does, replace paper path sensor 1. Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feeder paper conveying clutch on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary.
Check if paper feeder paper conveying clutch malfunctions.
Electrical problem with Check (see page 1-4-6). paper feeder paper conveying clutch. (5) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (jam in optional paper feeder vertical paper conveying section). Jam code 19 (6) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (multiple sheets in cassette 3). Jam code 24 Broken feed switch 3 actua- Check visually and replace switch. tor. Defective feed switch 3. Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 3 on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Broken switch actuator. Defective feed switch 3.
Check visually and replace switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 1 on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check (see page 1-4-6).
Defective paper feeder paper feed clutch 1. Electrical problem with paper feeder paper feed clutch 1. Defective feed pulleys or feed rollers.
1-4-3
5H0
1-4-2
Self-diagnosis
(1) Self-diagnostic function This unit is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, copying is disabled and the problem displayed as a code consisting of C followed by a number, indicating the nature of the problem. A message is also displayed requesting the user to call for service. After removing the problem, the self-diagnostic function can be reset by turning cover switch off and back on.
(2) Self diagnostic codes Remarks Code C0420 Contents Paper feeder communication error A communication error from paper feeder is detected 10 times in succession. Causes Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check procedures/corrective measures Check the connection of connector YC33 on the engine PWB and the connector YC1 on the paper feeder main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Replace the paper feeder main PWB or engine PWB and check for correct operation. Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Check the gears and remedy if necessary.
Defective PWB.
C1100
Paper feeder lift motor 1 error A motor over-current signal is detected continuously for 1 s or longer.
Paper feeder lift motor 1 does not rotate correctly (the motor is overloaded). C1110 Paper feeder lift motor 2 error A motor over-current signal is detected continuously for 1 s or longer. Poor contact in the connector terminals.
Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Check the gears and remedy if necessary.
Paper feeder lift motor 2 does not rotate correctly (the motor is overloaded). C1120 Paper feeder left lift position problem Paper feeder switch 2 does not turn on within 30 s of paper feeder lift motor 1 turning on. Poor contact in the connector terminals.
Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Check if YC5-7 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low when paper feeder lift switch 2 is turned off. If not, replace paper feeder lift switch 2. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace paper feeder lift motor 1. Check the gears and belts, and remedy if necessary.
Defective paper feeder lift switch 2.
Defective paper feeder lift motor 1. The paper feeder left lift does not rise properly.
1-4-4
5H0 Remarks Code C1130 Contents Paper feeder right lift position problem Paper feeder switch 1 does not turn on within 30 s of paper feeder lift motor 2 turning on. Causes Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check procedures/corrective measures Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Check if YC5-4 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low when paper feeder lift switch 1 is turned off. If not, replace paper feeder lift switch 1. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace paper feeder lift motor 2. Check the gears and belts, and remedy if necessary. Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation. Replace the paper feeder with another unit and check the operation. If the operation is normal, replace or repair optional paper feeder. Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not, grease the bushings and gears. Check for broken gears and replace if any. Replace the paper feeder main PWB or engine PWB and check for correct operation. Replace the paper feeder paper conveying motor.
Defective paper feeder lift switch 1.
Defective paper feeder lift motor 2. The paper feeder right lift does not rise properly. C1900 Paper feeder EEPROM error When writing the data, the write data and the read data is not continuously in agreement three times. Poor contact in the connector terminals.
Defective engine PWB. Defective paper feeder.
C2600
Paper feeder paper conveying motor error The lock signal of the motor is detected avobe 450 ms.
Defective drive transmission system. Defective PWB.
Defective paper feeder paper conveying motor.
1-4-5
5H0
1-4-3
Electric problems
Problem Causes Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check procedures/corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
(1) The paper feeder does not operate when the main power switch is turned on. (2) The paper feeder paper conveying motor does not operate.
Poor contact in the connector terminals. Broken the gear. Defective paper feeder paper conveying motor.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check visually and replace the gear if necessary. Run maintenance item U247 and check if the paper feeder paper conveying motor operates when CN2-2 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low. If not, replace the paper feeder paper conveying motor. Run maintenance item U247 and check if CN2-2 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low. If not, replace the paper feeder main PWB. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the motor. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check if CN7-13 or CN7-6 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low right after the cassette is installed. If not, replace the paper feeder main PWB. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the clutch. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Run maintenance item U247 and check if following terminals on the paper feeder main PWB goes low. If not, replace the paper feeder main PWB. Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1: CN4-3 Paper feeder paper feed clutch 2: CN4-1 Paper feeder paper conveying clutch: CN4-5
Defective paper feeder main PWB. (3) The lift motor 1/2 does not operate. Broken motor coil. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Defective paper feeder main PWB. (4) The paper feeder paper feed clutch 1/2 or paper feeder paper conveying clutch does not operate. Broken clutch coil. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Defective paper feeder main PWB.
1-4-6
5H0
1-4-4
Mechanical problems
Problem Causes/check procedures Check if the paper feeder separation roller 1 or 2 is soiled with paper powder. Check if paper feeder paper feed roller 1 or 2 is soiled with paper powder. Check if the paper feeder separation roller 1 or 2 is worn or deformed. Check if paper feeder paper feed roller 1 or 2 is worn or deformed. Check if paper feeder paper feed clutch 1, 2 or the paper feeder paper conveying clutch malfunctions. Corrective measures Clean with isopropyl alcohol. Clean with isopropyl alcohol. Replace (see page 1-5-2). Replace (see page 1-5-3). Remedy or replace.
(1) No primary paper feed.
(2) Skewed paper feed.
Check if the paper feeder separation roller 1 or 2 is worn or deformed. Check if dpaper feeder paper feed roller 1 or 2 is worn or deformed. Check if the paper side guides are deformed.
Replace (see page 1-5-2). Replace (see page 1-5-3). Remedy or replace. Change the paper. Correct. Replace (see page 1-5-2). Change the paper. Remedy or replace. Grease the bushings and gears. Replace. Remedy if necessary.
(3) Multiple sheets of paper are fed at one time.
Check if the paper is excessively curled. Paper is not loaded correctly. Check if the paper feeder separation roller 1 or 2 is worn or deformed.
(4) Paper jams.
Check if the paper is excessively curled. Check if the paper side guides are deformed.
(5) Check if rollers and gears operate smoothly. Abnormal noise is heard. Check for any abnormality with motors and clutches. Check for any drive belt out of place.
1-4-7
5H0
1-4-8
5H0
1-5-1
(1) Precautions Before starting disassembly, press the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the Power lamp is off before turning off the main power switch. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet. Turning off the main power switch before pressing the Power key to off may cause damage to the equipped hard disk. When handling PWBs (printed wiring boards), do not touch parts with bare hands. The PWBs are susceptible to static charge. Do not touch any PWB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge. When replacing battery on a PWB, dispose properly according to laws and regulations.
1-5-1
5H0
1-5-2
Paper feed section
(1) Detaching and refitting paper feeder separation roller 1 and 2 Clean or replace paper feeder separation roller 1, 2 as follows. Procedure 1. Open left cover 3. 2. Remove stop ring 1. 3. Remove the shaft. 4. Remove the paper feeder separation roller assembly. 5. Remove stop ring 2 securing paper feeder separation roller 2 and then the roller. 6. Remove stop ring 3 securing paper feeder separation roller 1 and then the roller. 7. Clean or replace paper feeder separation roller 1 and 2. 8. Refit all removed parts.
Paper feeder separation roller 2 Stop ring 2

p ape
Stop ring 1
r feed
e r se parat ion ro ller a ssem bly
Paper feeder separation roller 1 Stop ring 3
Shaft Stop ring 1
Figure 1-5-1
1-5-2
5H0 (2) Detaching and refitting the paper feeder paper conveying unit assembly Replace the desk upper or lower paper width switches as follows. Procedure 1. Open the cassette. 2. Remove left cover 3. 3. Remove two screws holding the paper feeder paper conveying unit assembly and then the assembly.
Paper feeder paper conveying unit assembly Screw
Screw
Figure 1-5-2 (3) Detaching and refitting paper feeder paper feed rollers 1 and 2 Clean or replace paper feed roller 1, 2 as follows. Procedure 1. Turn the paper feeder paper conveying unit over. 2. Remove the stop ring while lifting the paper feed roller section. 3. Pull out the shifting shaft and then paper feeder paper feed rollers 1 and 2. 4. Clean or replace paper feeder paper feed rollers 1 and 2. 5. Refit all removed parts.
Paper feeder paper feed roller 1 Shifting shaft
Paper feeder paper feed roller 2 Stop rings
Figure 1-5-3 1-5-3
5H0 (4) Adjusting the position of the center adjuster (center line alignment) Perform the following adjustment if the center lines of the copy image and the copy paper are misaligned. Procedure 1. Connect the power plug to the wall outlet and turn the main power switch on. 2. Run maintenance item 034 and output the test pattern. 3. If the center of the paper and that of the test pattern output do not meet the reference value, perform the following adjustment. <Reference value> Deviation to the left or right: 1.5 mm or less 4. Pull out the cassette of the paper feeder and loosen the three screws securing the adjuster. If the test pattern output looks like A, move the adjuster in the direction of the black arrow ( ) and retighten the three screws. If the test pattern output looks like B, move the adjuster in the direction of the white arrow ( ) and retighten the three screws.
Screw Adjuster
Screw Screw
Figure 1-5-4 5. Close the cassette. 6. Output a test pattern again. 7. Repeat steps 4 to 6 until the centers of the paper and the test pattern meet the reference value. <Reference value> Deviation to the left or right: 1.5 mm or less 8. If the position of the adjuster is changed, adjust the front cover position. If the front cover position is not proper, the cassette may not be fixed with the magnet or the gap between the front cover and the paper feeder may be opened. 9. Loosen the five screws. 10. Move the position of the front cover by the amount of divisions of the level that corresponds to the movement of the adjuster (amount of movement of the level) using the level. 11. Retighten the five screws
Divisions
Divisions
Divisions
Divisions
Divisions
Screws Adjuster Screw
Screws Front cover
Figure 1-5-5
1-5-4
5H0
2-1-1
The paper feeder consists mainly of the left and right cassettes and separation section. The left cassette paper feed section sends paper from the lift to paper feeder separation rollers 1 and 2. When the left cassette becomes empty, the right cassette paper feed section conveys paper onto the lift of the left cassette. The paper feeder separation rollers 1 and 2 in the separation section convey paper received from the left cassette paper feed section into the machine, preventing multiple sheets from being fed at one time.
Figure 2-1-1 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) Paper feeder paper feed roller 1 Paper feeder paper feed roller 2 Pickup arm Paper conveying base Lift Paper guide U Left cover 3 Paper feeder separation roller 1 (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) Paper feeder separation roller 2 Paper guide D Guide pulley Air damper Paper path sensor 1 (PPSENS1) Paper path sensor 2 (PPSENS2) Paper path sensor 3 (PPSENS3) Paper empty sensor (PESENS)
2-1-1
5H0 Left cassette paper feed As the paper feeder paper conveying clutch (PFCCL) turns on, the drive is transmitted to paper feeder separation rollers 1 and 2, starting paper feed from the left cassette. The paper feeder separation rollers 1 and 2 ensure that the paper is fed one sheet at a time and that it is fed into the machine correctly. To prevent multiple sheets from being fed, there is a torque limiter on paper feeder separation roller 2. When the left cassette is empty, its lift serves as a guide for the paper being conveyed from the right cassette lift.
Machine
Paper feeder separation roller 1
PFCCL Paper feeder separation roller 2
Paper path
Figure 2-1-2 Left cassette paper feed section
PFCCL
CN4-5 PFMPWB
PFCCL
Figure 2-1-3 Left cassette paper feed section block diagram
2-1-2
5H0 Right cassette paper feed As the last sheet in the left cassette is fed, paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2) and paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1) turn on for paper feed from the right cassette. Paper feeder paper feed rollers 1 and 2 start to rotate to convey paper from the right cassette onto the left cassette lift.
PPSENS2 PPSENS3 PPSENS1 PFPFCL1
PFPFCL2
Paper feeder paper feed roller 1
Paper feeder paper feed roller 2 Paper path
Figure 2-1-4 Right cassette paper feed section
PPSENS1
PPSENS2 PFPFCL1
PPSENS3 PFPFCL2
CN6-5 CN6-8 CN6-11 CN4-1 CN4-3 PFMPWB
PPSENS1 PPSENS2 PPSENS3 PFPFCL2 PFPFCL1
Figure 2-1-5 Right cassette paper feed section block diagram
2-1-3
5H0 Raising and lowering the lifts The following is a description of the right cassette lift operating mechanism. The left cassette lift operates in the same manner. Lift motor 2 (LM2) drives the right lift belt assembly that winches the belt up and hence raises the lift until it is stopped by level switch 2 (LSW2). When paper is loaded on the lift and the deck is closed, the lift is raised until level switch 2 (LSW2) turns on. When level switch 2 (LSW2) is turned off as the paper on the lift is used, lift motor 2 (LM2) starts to raise the lift until the switch turns on.
Lift Level switch 2 Winch shaft Lift motor 2
Air damper
Lift belt assembly
Figure 2-1-6 Raising and lowering the lift When the cassette is opened for removing a jammed paper or other purposes, the winch shaft is released from its holder on lift motor 2 (LM2), allowing the lift to descend under its own weight. The air damper buffers the impact of the descending lift.
LSW1
LSW2
LM2
LM1
CN5-4 CN5-7 LM1 LM2 CN7-13 CN7-6 PFMPWB
LSW1 LSW2
Figure 2-1-7 Lift block diagram
2-1-4
5H0 Detecting the paper level The lift rises as paper in the cassette is used. When the remaining number of sheets in either right or left cassette reduces to around 100 to 250 sheets, the projection on the lift belt assembly pushes against the sensor lever which turns the relevant paper level detection sensor 1 or 2 (PLDSENS1/2) on. When both paper level detection sensors 1 and 2 (PLDSENS1/2) have turned on, the message [Low on paper.] is shown on the machine message display. This message is not shown when only one of them is on. As more copies are made with the message on, paper path sensors 1, 2 and 3 (PPSENS1/2/3) or the paper empty sensor (PESENS) start to detect absence of paper, and the message [Add paper in cassette 3.(Add paper cassette 3.)] is shown.
Sensor lever
Paper level detection sensor 1 or 2 (PLDSENS1/2) Lift belt assembly
Figure 2-1-8 Detecting the paper level
PLDSENS1
PLDSENS2
CN2-1 CN3-3 PFMPWB
Figure 2-1-9 Paper level detection system block diagram
2-1-5
5H0
2-1-6
5H0
2-2-1
(1) PWBs
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-1 PWBs 1. 2. Paper feeder main PWB (PFMPWB) ........... Controls electrical components and communications with the machine. Sensor relay PWB (SENRYPWB)................
2-2-1
5H0 (2) Switches and sensors

1 2 5 3 8 4 6
7 9 10
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-2 Switches and sensors 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Paper path sensor 1 (PPSENS1)................. Detect paper jams and the absence of paper on the lifts. Paper path sensor 2 (PPSENS2)................. Detect paper jams and the absence of paper on the lifts. Paper path sensor 3 (PPSENS3)................. Detect paper jams and the absence of paper on the lifts. Paper empty sensor (PESENS)................... Detects the absence of paper in the right cassette. Level switch 1 (LSW1) ................................. Detects the left cassette lift in the home position. Level switch 2 (LSW2) ................................. Detects the right cassette lift in the home position. Left cover 3 switch (LC3SW) ....................... Detects if left cover 3 is open or closed. Paper feeder open/closed safety switch (PFOSSW) ................................................... Detects if the paper feeder is open or closed. 9. Paper level detection sensor 1 (PLDSENS1)................................................ Detects the paper level in the left cassette. 10. Paper level detection sensor 2 (PLDSENS2)................................................ Detects the paper level in the right cassette.
2-2-2
5H0 (3) Other electrical components

1 2 3
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-3 Other electrical components 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Paper feeder paper conveying clutch (PFCCL)....................................................... Regulates drive transmission to paper feeder separation rollers 1 and 2. Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1)................................................... Regulates drive transmission to paper feeder paper feed roller 1. Paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2)................................................... Regulates drive transmission to paper feeder paper feed roller 2. Paper feeder paper conveying motor (PFCM) ........................................................ Drives the paper feeder. Lift motor 1 (LM1)......................................... Raises the left cassette lift. Lift motor 2 (LM2)......................................... Raises the right cassette lift. Paper feeder cassette heater 1* (PFCH1) ... Dehumidifies paper in the left cassette. Paper feeder cassette heater 2* (PFCH2) ... Dehumidifies paper in the right cassette.
*Optional.
2-2-3
5H0
2-2-4
5H0
2-3-1
Paper feeder main PWB
PF RXD PF TXD From the machine Paper feeder paper conveying motor drive circuit
Communication circuit Latch ROM PFSCL
PFCM
CPU (IC8)
PFCCL Clutch drive circuit
PFPFCL2
LM1
LM1 drive circuit LED drive circuit PFPFCL1
LM2
LM2 drive circuit
PPSENS1 PPSENS2 PPSENS3
Reset circuit
PESENS
LSW2 24 V DC 5 V DC PGND SGND LC3SW
PLDSENS1 PLDSENS2
Oscillator circuit PFMPWB
LSW1 SENRYPWB PFOSSW
Figure 2-3-1 Paper feeder main PWB diagram
2-3-1
5H0
3 CN3
1 15 CN6 1 1
1 CN1 CN4 6 1 1 CN3 7 CN2 8 1 9 10
Figure 2-3-2 Paper feeder main PWB silk-screen diagram
2-3-2
5H0 Connector CN1 Connected to the machine Pin No. Signal 1 FEED SW SIG 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 CN2 Connected to the paper level detection sensor 1 and paper feeder paper conveying motor CN3 Connected to the paper level detection sensor 2 YC4 Connected to the paper feeder paper feed clutch 1/2, paper feeder paper conveying clutch and paper feeder separation clutch CN5 Connected to the sensor relay PWB and level switch 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 READY SDO(IN) SDO(OUT) CLK SELECT DC5V SGND PGND DC24V RS1_3 SGND DC5V PGND DC24V MOT_ON LD DC5V SGND RS2_3 I/O I O I O I I I I I O O O I O I Voltage 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC (pulse) 0/5 V DC (pulse) 0/5 V DC (pulse) 0/5 V DC 5 V DC 24 V DC 0/5 V DC 5 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/5 V DC (pulse) 5 V DC 0/5 V DC Description FSW3 On/Off signal from the machine Ready signal to the machine Serial communication signal from the machine Serial communication signal to the machine Clock signal from the machine Select signal from the machine 5 V DC power supply Signal ground Power ground 24 V DC power supply PLDSENS1: On/Off Signal ground 5 V DC supply for PLDSENS1 Power ground 24 V DC supply for PFCM PFCM: On/Off PFCM lock signal 5 V DC supply for PLDSENS2 Signal ground PLDSENS2: On/Off
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
P2_CL DC24V P1_CL DC24V B_CL DC24V B_CL DC24V
O O O O O O O O
0/24 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC
PFPFCL2: On/Off 24 V DC supply for PFPFCL2 PFPFCL1: On/Off 24 V DC supply for PFPFCL1 PFCCL: On/Off 24 V DC supply for PFCCL PFSCL: On/Off 24 V DC supply for PFSCL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
FRONT_COVER SGND DC5V LEVEL_S1 N.C. N.C. LEVEL_S2 SGND 5V
I O I I O
5/0 V DC 5 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC 5 V DC
PFOSSW: On/Off Signal ground 5 V DC supply for SENRYPWB LSW1: On/Off Not used Not used LSW2: On/Off Signal ground 5 V DC supply for LSW2
2-3-3
5H0 Connector CN6 Connected to the paper path sensor 1/2/3 and paper empty sensor Pin No. Signal 1 SIDE_COVER 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 CN7 Connected to the Lift motor 1/2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 SGND DC5V PPS0_CLK PPS0 DC5V PPS1_CLK PPS1 DC5V PPS2_CLK PPS2 DC5V EMP_S_CLK EMP_S DC5V RS2_2 SGND RS2_1 NC DC24V LMOT2 NC RS1_2 SGND RS1_1 NC DC24V LMOT1 I/O I O O I O O I O O I O O I O I I O I I I O O Voltage 5/0 V DC 5 V DC 5/4 V DC (pulse) 5/0 V DC (pulse)/0 V DC 5 V DC 5/4 V DC (pulse) 5/0 V DC (pulse)/0 V DC 5 V DC 5/4 V DC (pulse) 5/0 V DC (pulse)/0 V DC 5 V DC 5/4 V DC (pulse) 5/0 V DC (pulse)/0 V DC 5 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC Description LC3SW: On/Off Signal ground 5 V DC supply for LC3SW PPSENS1 clock signal PPSENS1: On/Off 5 V DC supply for PPSENS1 PPSENS2 clock signal PPSENS2: On/Off 5 V DC supply for PPSENS2 PPSENS3 clock signal PPSENS3: On/Off 5 V DC supply for PPSENS3 PESENS clock signal PESENS: On/Off 5 V DC supply for PESENS LM2: On/Off Signal ground LM2: On/Off Not used 24 V DC supply for LM2 LM2: On/Off Not used LM1: On/Off Signal ground LM1: On/Off Not used 24 V DC supply for LM1 LM1: On/Off
2-3-4
5H0
2-4 Appendixes

Maintenance part name Name used in service manual Push paper sensor Surface view sensor Upper cover sensor Paper conveying sensor Paper path sensor 1/2/3 Paper empty sensor Level switch 1/2 Paper feeder open/closed safety switch Name used in parts list H-PICK ROLLER PULLEY,PAPER FEED PULLEY,SEPARATION C-PICK PULLEY TLP1241(C5,F) SNS-SPI-338 SNS-SPI-338 SNS-SPI-338 Part No. 5A707600 5FH06010 5FH06020 5A707580 305H080320 5A707980 5A707980 5A707980 Alternative part No. 5H080320 Fig. No. 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 Ref. No. 22 49 42 18 9 3 3 3

Section Paper conveying section Maintenance part/location Push paper sensor Surface view sensor Upper cover sensor Paper conveying sensor Adjusting hone position sensor Exit sensor Tray upper limit sensor Tray lower limit sensor Reverse sensor Exit roller Paper conveying belt Paper conveying roller Paddle Front static eliminator Rear static eliminator Reverse static eliminator Push paper lever cushion Method Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Check Check Check Cleaning Maintenance cycle Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Points and cautions Air brush Air brush Air brush Air brush Air brush Air brush Air brush Air brush Air brush Wipe with cloth moistened with alcohol. Wipe with cloth moistened with alcohol. Wipe with cloth moistened with alcohol. Wipe with cloth moistened with alcohol. If paper powder or dust adheres to tip of brush, remove it. If paper powder or dust adheres to tip of brush, remove it. If paper powder or dust adheres to tip of brush, remove it. Wipe with cloth moistened with alcohol. Page
2-4-1
5H0
2-4-2
5H0
Wiring diagram
Machine Wire color Mark BN YW BE WE RD OE LB GY BK PE
*RESET
PF RXD
PGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
5.1 V
24 V
PF TXD
PFPFCL2
FSW3 SIG
PFCH1
PFCH2
Brown Yellow
NC
NC
Blue White Red Orange Light blue Gray Black Purple
1 2 PFPFCL1 2 1 1 2 1 2 1
9 10 11 12
YW
4 3 PFCCL 2 1 1 2 2 1
1 2 3 4 BE BE BE BE BE 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE CN5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PFOSSW SGND 5V LSW1 SGND 5V LSW2 SGND 5V BE BE BE BE BE BE 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
GY
GY
OE
GY
3 3 2 2
RD
10 9 10 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
BN
1 1
BE
BK
LB
*RESET
PF RXD
PF TXD
CN4
PFSCL
RD RD
24 V PFPFCL1 24 V PFCCL 24 V
5V
24 V
BE
PFPFCL2
FSW3 SIG
PGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
5 CN1 CN2 LD CM 24 V PGND 5V SGND PLDSENS1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 PE PE PE PE PE PE PE 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1 PFCM
1 PFOSSW 2 3 1 LSW1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3
3 2 1 3 2 1
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
RD BE BE BE BE BE BE
3 2 1 PLDSENS1
1 LSW2 2 3
1 2 3
2 1
CN7 LM2 SW2 SGND LM2 SW1 NC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 BE BE BE 5 BE BE 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 LM1 PE PE PE PE PE 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 LM2
10 10 NC
1 LC3SW 2 3
1 2 3 RD RD 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Drawer connectors 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 WE WE WE WE WE WE WE WE WE WE WE WE WE EW WE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24 V CN6 LC3SW SGND 5V PPSENS1 CLK PPSENS1 5V PPSENS2 CLK PPSENS2 5V LM2 NC LM1 SW2 SGND LM1 SW1 NC 24 V LM1
1 PPSENS1 2 3
1 2 3 6 5 4 1 2 3 4 5 6
RD WE WE WE WE WE WE WE WE
10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13
1 PPSENS2 2 3
1 2 3
3 2 1
10 10 PPSENS3 CLK 11 11 PPSENS3 12 12 5 V 13 13 PESENS CLK 14 14 PESENS 15 15 5 V PFMPWB CN3 5V SGND PLDSENS2 1 2 3 1 2 3 PE PE PE 3 2 1 3 2 1 PLDSENS2
1 PPSENS3 2 3
1 2 3
WE WE WE WE
1 PESENS 2 3
1 2 3
2-4-3
DP-700
3JX
CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications
1-2 Installation
1-2-1 Installation environment ..........................................................................................................................1-2-1 1-2-2 Unpacking ...............................................................................................................................................1-2-2 (1) Unpacking .........................................................................................................................................1-2-2 (2) Remove the tapes and pad ...............................................................................................................1-2-3

1-3-1 Maintenance mode .................................................................................................................................1-3-1 (1) Executing a maintenance item ..........................................................................................................1-3-1 (2) Maintenance mode item list...............................................................................................................1-3-2 (3) Contents of maintenance mode items...............................................................................................1-3-3
1-4 Troubleshooting
1-4-1 Original misfeed detection ......................................................................................................................1-4-1 (1) Original misfeed indication ................................................................................................................1-4-1 (2) Original misfeed detection conditions................................................................................................1-4-1 (3) Paper misfeeds .................................................................................................................................1-4-3 1-4-2 Self-diagnosis .........................................................................................................................................1-4-4 (1) Self-diagnostic function .....................................................................................................................1-4-4 (2) Self diagnostic codes ........................................................................................................................1-4-4 1-4-3 Electric problems ....................................................................................................................................1-4-6 1-4-4 Mechanical problems ..............................................................................................................................1-4-6

1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly............................................................................................1-5-1 (1) Precautions .......................................................................................................................................1-5-1 1-5-2 Assembly and Disassembly ....................................................................................................................1-5-2 (1) Detaching and refitting the DP original feed belt and DP forwarding pulley......................................1-5-2 (2) Detaching and refitting the DP separation pulley ..............................................................................1-5-4 (3) Detaching and refitting the CIS .........................................................................................................1-5-5


2-2-1 Electrical parts layout..............................................................................................................................2-2-1 (1) PWBs ................................................................................................................................................2-2-1 (2) Switches and sensors .......................................................................................................................2-2-2 (3) Others................................................................................................................................................2-2-3

2-3-1 DP main PWB .........................................................................................................................................2-3-1 2-3-2 DP drive relay PWB ................................................................................................................................2-3-7 2-3-3 CIS relay PWB ......................................................................................................................................2-3-13
2-4 Appendixes
3JX
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1
Specifications
Original feed system ....................... Automatic feed Original type.................................... Sheet originals Original sizes .................................. A3/Ledger to A5R/StatementR Original weights .............................. 45 to 160 g/m2 No. of originals................................ 100 sheets or less (50 to 80 g/m2) Power source.................................. Electrically connected to the machine. Dimensions ..................................... 569 (W) x 525 (D) x 149 (H) mm 22 3/8" (W) x 20 11/16" (D) x 5 7/8" (H) Weight............................................. Approx. 13 kg/28.6 lbs
1-1-1
3JX
1-1-2
Parts names
5 6
3
Figure 1-1-1 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Original tray Original width guides Opening handle Original eject table Top cover Original placement indicator
1-1-2
3JX
1-1-3
Original path
1. 2. 3.
Original feeding/conveying section Original scanning section Original eject section
1-1-3
3JX
1-1-4
3JX
1-2 Installation
1-2-1
1.
1-2-1
3JX
1-2-2
Unpacking
(1) Unpacking
Figure 1-2-1 Unpacking 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Document processor Outer case Inner frame Front pad Rear bottom pad Rear top pad Sheet Pad Bar code labels 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. Spacer Plastic bag Original mat Fixing fittings Angle control fitting Pins M4 x 14 TP screws Installation guide
1-2-2
3JX (2) Remove the tapes and pad Procedure 1. Remove five tapes.
Tape
Tapes Tapes
Figure 1-2-2
2. Open the top cover and the reverse unit. 3. Remove the film and pad.
Top cover Reverse unit Film
Pad
Figure 1-2-3
1-2-3
3JX
1-2-4
3JX
1-3-1
Maintenance mode
Start
Press the stop key.
Yes
No
Yes
End
1-3-1
3JX (2) Maintenance mode item list Section General Optical Item No. U019 U061 U068 U070 U071 U072 U074 U087 Operation panel and support Mode setting Image processing U203 U243 U244 U326 U404 U411 U425 Other U905 U942 U990 Content of maintenance item Displaying the ROM version Turning the exposure lamp on Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP Adjusting the DP magnification Adjusting the DP scanning timing Adjusting the DP center line Adjusting the DP input light luminosity Setting DP reading position modification operation Checking DP operation Checking the operation of the DP motors Checking the DP switches Setting the black line cleaning indication Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP Adjusting the scanner automatically Setting the target Checking/clearing counts by optional devices Setting of amount of slack for feeding from DP Checking/clearing the time for the exposure lamp to light Initial setting* 0/0*1 0/0/0*1 0/0/0/0/0*1 0/0/0*1 0/0/0*1 175/170/160*1 ON/8*1,*2 3.0/2.5/3.0/4.0*1 3.0/2.5/3.0/4.0*1 0/0*1 -
*Initial setting for executing U020, *1: The item initialized for executing U020, *2: The item initialized for executing U021
1-3-2
3JX (3) Contents of maintenance mode items Maintenance item No. U019 Description Displaying the ROM version Description Displays the part number of the ROM fitted to each PWB. Purpose To check the part number or to decide, if the newest version of ROM is installed. Method 1. Press the start key. The ROM version are displayed. 2. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys Display MAIN MMI ENGINE ENGINE BOOT SCANNER OPTION LANGUAGE DICTIONARY DP LCF OPTION CASSETTE DF MAIN DF MTRAY DF SADDLE DF MAILBOX INNER DF SIMPLE DF MAIN FAX BOOT1 FAX APL1 FAX IPL1 FAX BOOT2 FAX APL2 FAX IPL2 Description Main PWB ROM IC Operation PWB ROM IC Engine PWB ROM IC Engine PWB booting Scanner PWB ROM IC Optional language ROM IC DP main PWB ROM IC Optional 3000-sheet paper feeder main PWB ROM IC Optional paper feeder main PWB ROM IC Optional 3000-sheet document finisher main PWB ROM IC Optional 3000-sheet document finisher internal tray PWB ROM IC Optional centerfold main PWB ROM IC Optional mail box main PWB ROM IC Optional built-in finisher main PWB ROM IC Optional document sheet finisher main PWB ROM IC Optional fax control PWB booting Optional fax control PWB APL Optional fax control PWB IPL -
Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-3
3JX Maintenance item No. U061 Turning the exposure lamp on Description Turns the exposure lamp on. Purpose To check the exposure lamp. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item. Display CCD CIS Description Exposure lamp CIS (DP exposure lamp)
Description
3. Press the start key. The selected lamp lights. 4. To turn the exposure lamp off, press the stop key. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U068 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP Description Adjusts the position for scanning originals from the DP. Performs the test copy at the five scanning positions after adjusting. Purpose Used when the image fogging occurs because the scanning position is not proper when the DP is used. Run U071 to adjust the timing of DP leading edge when the scanning position is changed. Setting 1. Press the start key. Display ADJUST DATA TEST POSITION Description Starting position adjustment for scanning originals Scanning position for the test copy originals Setting range -55 to 55 0 to 3 Initial setting 0 0 Change in value per step 0.11 mm 0.71 mm
2. Select [ADJUST DATA] of the screen for selecting an item. 3. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. When the setting value is increased, the scanning position moves to the right and it moves to the left when the setting value is decreased. 4. Press the start key. The value is set. 5. Select [TEST POSITION] of the screen for selecting an item. 6. Select the Scanning position using the +/- or numeric keys. 7. Press the start key. The value is set. 8. Set the original (the one which density is known) in the DP and press the system menu key. The screen for the test copy mode is displayed. 9. Press the start key. Test copy is executed. 10. Perform the test copy at each scanning position with the setting value from 0 to 4 and check that no black line appears and the image is normally scanned. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-4
3JX Maintenance item No. U070
Description Adjusting the DP magnification Description Adjusts the DP original scanning speed. Purpose Make the adjustment if the magnification is incorrect in the main scanning direction or auxiliary scanning direction when the DP is used. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be adjusted. Display CIS MAIN ADJ Description Magnification in the main scanning direction of CIS Setting range -25 to 25 -25 to 25 -15 to 10 Initial setting 0 0 0 Change in value per step 0.1 % 0.1 % 0.05 %
CONVEY SPEED Magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction of CCD CIS SUB ADJ Magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction of CIS
Adjustment: main scanning direction of CIS 1. Press the system menu key. 2. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy. 3. Press the system menu key. 4. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys. For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.
Original
Copy example 1
Copy example 2
Figure 1-3-1 5. Press the start key. The value is set. Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode.
U070 U071 (P.1-3-6) U404 (P.1-3-12)
Adjustment: auxiliary scanning direction of CCD/CIS 1. Press the system menu key. 2. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy. 3. Press the system menu key. 4. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys. For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.
Original
Copy example 1
Copy example 2
Figure 1-3-2 5. Press the start key. The value is set. 1-3-5
Description Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode.
U070 U071 (P.1-3-6) U404 (P.1-3-12)
Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U071 Adjusting the DP scanning timing Description Adjusts the DP original scanning timing. Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and the copy image when the DP is used. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be adjusted. Display ADJUST DATA1 ADJUST DATA2 ADJUST DATA3 ADJUST DATA4 ADJUST DATA5 Description Leading edge registration (first page) Trailing edge registration (first page) Leading edge registration (second page) Trailing edge registration (second page) Leading edge registration (rotate copying) Setting range -32 to 32 -32 to 32 -45 to 45 -45 to 45 -20 to 20 Initial setting 0 0 0 0 0 Change in value per step 0.09 mm 0.09 mm 0.09 mm 0.09 mm 0.17 mm
Adjustment: leading edge registration 1. Press the system menu key. 2. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy. 3. Press the system menu key. 4. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys. For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.
Original
Copy example 1
Copy example 2
U071 U404 (P.1-3-12)
1-3-6
Description Adjustment: trailing edge registration 1. Press the system menu key. 2. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy. 3. Press the system menu key. 4. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys. For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 3, decrease the value.
Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 Copy example 3
U071 U404 (P.1-3-12)
1-3-7
Description Adjusting the DP center line Description Adjusts the scanning start position for the DP original. Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the centers of the original and the copy image when the DP is used. Adjustment 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be adjusted. Display ADJUST DATA1 ADJUST DATA2 ADJUST DATA3 3. 4. 5. 6. Description Setting range Initial setting 0 0 0 Change in value per step 0.17 mm 0.17 mm 0.17 mm
Center line for the simplex copy mode -39 to 39 Center line for the duplex copy mode Center line for rotate copying -39 to 39 -7 to 7
Press the system menu key. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy. Press the system menu key. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys. For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.
Reference
Original
Copy example 1
Copy example 2
U072 U404 (P.1-3-12)
1-3-8
Description Adjusting the DP input light luminosity Description Adjusts the luminosity of the exposure lamp for scanning originals from the DP. Purpose Used if the exposure amount differs significantly between when scanning an original on the contact glass and when scanning an original from the DP. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be set. Display R G B Description DP input light luminosity of R image DP input light luminosity of G image DP input light luminosity of B image Setting range -12 to 12 -12 to 12 -12 to 12 Initial setting 0 0 0
3. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Increasing the setting makes the luminosity higher, and decreasing it makes the luminosity lower. 4. Press the start key. The value is set. Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed, copying from an original is available in the interrupt copying mode. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U087 Setting DP reading position modification operation Description The presence or absence of dust is determined by comparing the scan data of the original trailing edge and that taken after the original is conveyed past the DP original scanning position. If dust is identified, the DP original scanning position is adjusted for the following originals. Purpose When using DP, to solve the problem when black lines occurs due to the dust with respect to original reading position. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be set. The setting screen for the selected item is displayed. Display CCD BLACK Description Setting of standard data when dust is detected. Initialization of original reading position.
Setting: standard data when dust is detected 1. Select the item to be set. 2. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys. Display CCD R CCD G CCD B Description Lowest density of the R regard as the dust. Lowest density of the G regard as the dust. Lowest density of the B regard as the dust. Setting range 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 Initial setting 175 170 160
3. Press the start key. The value is set. Setting: Initialization of original reading position 1. Select [CLEAR]. 2. Press the start key. The setting is cleared. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-9
Description Checking DP operation Description Simulates the original conveying operation separately in the DP. Purpose To check the DP operation. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Place an original in the DP if running this simulation with paper. 3. Select the item to be operated. 4. When selecting [TEST2], to set the magnification using the +/- keys. Display TEST 1(NON P) TEST 2 Operation Without paper With paper Setting range 100 to 200 (%) Initial setting 100
5. Press the start key. The operation starts. 6. To stop continuous operation, press the stop key. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U243 Checking the operation of the DP motors Description Turns the motors in the DP on. Purpose To check the operation of the DP motors. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be operated. 3. Press the start key. The operation starts. Display DP FEED MOTOR DP REG MOTOR DP CONV MOTOR DP LIFT MOTOR CIS FAN MOTOR DP FEED MOT REV Motors Original feed motor (OFM) is turned on. Original registration motor (ORM) is turned on. Original conveying motor (OCM) is turned on. DP lift motor (DPLM) is turned on. DP fan motor 1,2,3 (DPFM1,2,3) is turned on. Original feed motor (OFM) is turned on reversing.
4. To stop operation, press the stop key. Completion Press the stop key when operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-10
Description Checking the DP switches Description Displays the status of the respective switches in the DP. Purpose To check if respective switches in the DP operate correctly. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Turn the respective switches on and off manually to check the status. When a switch is detected to be in the ON position, the display for that switch will be highlighted. Display LIFT LOW LIM SW LIFT UP LIM SW DP SET SW DP PSD SW DP FEED SW DP REG SW CCD TMING SW CIS TMING SW DP COVER SW DP OPEN SW Switches DP lift upper limit switch (DPLULSW) DP lift lower limit switch (DPLLLSW) Original set switch (OSSW) Original size length switch (OLSW) Original feed switch (OFSW) Original registration switch (ORSW) DP timing switch 1 (DPTSW1) DP timing switch 2 (DPTSW2) DP safety switch 2 (DPSSW2) DP safety switch 1 (DPSSW1)
Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U326 Setting the black line cleaning indication Description Sets whether to display the cleaning guidance when detecting the black line. Purpose Displays the cleaning guidance in order to make the call for service with the black line decrease by the rubbish on the platen when scanning from the DP. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select ON or OFF. Display ON OFF COUNT Description Displays the cleaning guidance Not to display the cleaning guidance Setting counts of the cleaning guidance indication
Initial setting: ON 3. Press the start key. The setting is set. Setting the count value 1. Select [COUNT]. 2. Enter a count using the +/- or numeric keys. Setting range: 0 to 999 Initial setting: 8 When setting is 0, the black line cleaning indication is displayed only if the black line is detected. 3. Press the start key. The count is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-11
Description Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP Description Adjusts margins for scanning the original from the DP. Purpose Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect when the DP is used. Caution Before making this adjustment, ensure that the following adjustments have been made in maintenance mode
U402 (See the service manual for the machine.)) U403 (See the service manual for the machine.) U404
Adjustment 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be adjusted. Display A MARGIN B MARGIN C MARGIN D MARGIN A MARGIN(BACK) B MARGIN(BACK) C MARGIN(BACK) D MARGIN(BACK) 3. 4. 5. 6. Description Left margin (first page) Leading edge margin (first page) Right margin (first page) Trailing edge margin (first page) Left margin (second page) Leading edge margin (second page) Right margin (second page) Trailing edge margin (second page) Setting range 0 to 10.0 0 to 10.0 0 to 10.0 0 to 10.0 0 to 10.0 0 to 10.0 0 to 10.0 0 to 10.0 Initial setting 3.0 2.5 3.0 4.0 3.0 2.5 3.0 4.0 Change in value per step 0.1 mm 0.1 mm 0.1 mm 0.1 mm 0.1 mm 0.1 mm 0.1 mm 0.1 mm
Press the system menu key. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy. Press the system menu key. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys. Increasing the value makes the margin wider, and decreasing it makes the margin narrower.
Leading edge margin (31.5mm) Ejection direction (reference)
Left margin (21.0mm)
Right margin (21.0mm)
Trailing edge margin (21.0mm)
Figure 1-3-6 7. Press the start key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-12
Description Adjusting the scanner automatically Description Uses a specified original and automatically adjusts the following items in the scanner and the DP scanning sections. Purpose To perform automatic adjustment of various items in the scanner and the DP scanning sections. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item. The screen for executing is displayed. Display SCANNER DP(FACE UP) DP(FACE DOWN) Description Automatic adjustment in the scanner section Automatic adjustment in the DP scanning section (first page) Automatic adjustment in the DP scanning section (second page) Original to be used for adjustment (P/N) 302FZ56990 2AC68241 2AC68241/303JX57010/ 303JX57020
Remarks Cut the trailing edge of the original as shown when the specified original (P/N: 2AC68241) is used.
128 + - 1mm 60 + - 1mm Cut with the edge of black belt.
Figure 1-3-7 Method: SCANNER 1. Enter the target values which are shown on the specified original (P/N: 302FZ56990) executing maintenance item U425. 2. Set a specified original (P/N: 302FZ56990) on the platen. 3. Select the item. Display ALL Description Automatic adjustment using the platen for: original size magnification/leading edge timing/center line, input gamma, chromatic aberration filter, MTF filter and matrix. Automatic adjustment using the platen for: original size magnification/leading edge timing/center line. Automatic adjustment using the platen for: input gamma. Automatic adjustment using the platen for: chromatic aberration filter. Automatic adjustment using the platen for: MTF filter. Automatic adjustment using the platen for: matrix.
INPUT GAMMA C.A. MTF MATRIX
4. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [RESULT OK 00] is displayed. If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, [ERROR XX] (XX is replaced by an error code) is displayed and operation stops. Should this happen, determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure from the beginning, or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance items. 5. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop key. 1-3-13
Description Method: DP(FACE UP) 1. Set a specified original (P/N: 2AC68241) in the DP. 2. Select [INPUT]. Display INPUT Description Automatic adjustment of first page using the DP for: original size magnification/leading edge timing/center line.
3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [RESULT OK 00] is displayed. If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, [ERROR XX] (XX is replaced by an error code) is displayed and operation stops. Should this happen, determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure from the beginning, or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance items. 4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop key. Method: DP(FACE DOWN) 1. Select the item. The screen for executing is displayed. Display NORMAL TARGET ORIGINAL TARGET Method: NORMAL TREGET 1. Select the item. Display ALL Description Automatic adjustment of second page using the DP for: original size magnification/leading edge timing/ center line, input gamma, chromatic aberration filter, MTF filter and matrix. Automatic adjustment of second page using the DP for: original size magnification/leading edge timing/ center line. Automatic adjustment of second page using the DP for: tolerance of input gamma. Automatic adjustment of second page using the DP for: tolerance of MTF filter and matrix. Original to be used for adjustment (P/N) 2AC68241/303JX57010/ 303JX57020 Description Uses the value determined using maintenance item U425 as the target data. Uses the specified original for acquiring data as the target data.
INPUT
2AC68241
GAMMA MTF/MATRIX
303JX57010 303JX57020
[ALL] 1. Enter the target values which are shown on the specified original (P/N: 2AC68241/303JX57010/ 303JX57020) executing maintenance item U425. 2. Set specified originals (P/N: 2AC68241/303JX57010/303JX57020) in the DP. Stack the originals in the order of 2AC68241, 303JX57010, and 303JX57020. 3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. [INPUT] 1. Enter the target values which are shown on the specified original (P/N: 2AC68241) executing maintenance item U425. 2. Set a specified original (P/N: 2AC24681) in the DP. 3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. [GAMMA] 1. Enter the target values which are shown on the specified original (P/N: 303JX57010) executing maintenance item U425. 2. Set a specified original (P/N: 303JX57010) in the DP. 3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. [MTF/MATRIX] 1. Enter the target values which are shown on the specified original (P/N: 303JX57020) executing maintenance item U425. 2. Set a specified original (P/N: 303JX57020) in the DP. 3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. 1-3-14
Description When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [RESULT OK 00] is displayed. If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, [ERROR XX] (XX is replaced by an error code) is displayed and operation stops. Should this happen, determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure from the beginning, or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance items. Method: ORIGINAL TARGET 1. Place the specified original for acquiring gamma target data (P/N: 303JX57010) on the platen, and press the start key. 2. Place the specified original for acquiring matrix target data (P/N: 303JX57010) on the platen, and press the start key. 3. Select the item. Display ALL Description Automatic adjustment of second page using the DP for: original size magnification/leading edge timing/ center line, input gamma, chromatic aberration filter, MTF filter and matrix. Automatic adjustment of second page using the DP for: original size magnification/leading edge timing/ center line. Automatic adjustment of second page using the DP for: input gamma. Automatic adjustment of second page using the DP for: MTF filter and matrix. Original to be used for adjustment (P/N) 2AC68241/303JX57010/ 303JX57020
INPUT
2AC68241
GAMMA MTF/MATRIX
303JX57010 303JX57020
[ALL] 1. Set specified originals (P/N: 2AC68241/303JX57010/303JX57020) in the DP. Stack the originals in the order of 2AC68241, 303JX57010, and 303JX57020. 2. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. [INPUT] 1. Set a specified original (P/N: 2AC24681) in the DP. 2. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. [GAMMA] 1. Set a specified original (P/N: 303JX57010) in the DP. 2. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. [MTF/MATRIX] 1. Set a specified original (P/N: 303JX57020) in the DP. 2. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [RESULT OK 00] is displayed. If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, [ERROR XX] (XX is replaced by an error code) is displayed and operation stops. Should this happen, determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure from the beginning, or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance items.
1-3-15
3JX Maintenance item No. U411 Error Codes Codes ERROR 01 ERROR 02 ERROR 03 ERROR 04 ERROR 05 ERROR 06 ERROR 07 ERROR 08 ERROR 09 ERROR 0a ERROR 0b ERROR 0c ERROR 0d ERROR 0e ERROR 0f ERROR 10 ERROR 11 ERROR 12 ERROR 13 ERROR 14 ERROR 15 ERROR 16 ERROR 17 ERROR 18 ERROR 19 ERROR 1a ERROR 1b ERROR 2X ERROR 3X ERROR 4X ERROR 5X ERROR 6X ERROR 7X ERROR 8X ERROR 9X ERROR aX ERROR bX ERROR cX ERROR dX ERROR eX ERROR fX ERROR ff Description Black band detection error (scanner leading edge registration) Black band detection error (scanner center line) Black band detection error (scanner main scanning direction magnification) Black band is not detected (scanner leading edge registration) Black band is not detected (scanner center line) Black band is not detected (scanner main scanning direction magnification) Black band is not detected (scanner auxiliary scanning direction magnification) Black band is not detected (DP main scanning direction magnification far end) Black band is not detected (DP main scanning direction magnification near end) Black band is not detected (DP auxiliary scanning direction magnification leading edge) Black band is not detected (DP auxiliary scanning direction magnification leading edge original check) Black band is not detected (DP auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge) Black band is not detected (DP auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge 2) DMA time out Auxiliary scanning direction magnification error Auxiliary scanning direction leading edge detection error Auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge detection error Auxiliary scanning direction skew 1.5 error Maintenance request error Main scanning direction center line error Main scanning direction skew 1.5 error Main scanning direction magnification error Carriage error Service call error DP status error DP open error Original is not detected N950 patch for the original error N850 patch for the original error N770 patch for the original error N650 patch for the original error N500 patch for the original error N300 patch for the original error N300 patch for the original error N950 patch for the original error Cyan patch for the original error Magenta patch for the original error Yellow patch for the original error Red patch for the original error Green patch for the original error Blue patch for the original error Other error
Description
Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed. If the stop key is pressed during auto adjustment, adjustment stops and no settings are changed.
1-3-16
Description Setting the target Description The value that is indicated on the back of the chart to be used for adjustment should be entered. Purpose Performs data input in order to correct for differences in originals during automatic adjustment. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item. The screen for executing is displayed. Display CCD CIS Description Entering the target values for scanner automatic adjustment Entering the target values for DP automatic adjustment Original to be used for adjustment (P/N) 302FZ56990 2AC68241/303JX57010/ 303JX57020
Setting: CCD 1. Select the item to be set. Display N850 N500 N200 CYAN MAGENTA YELLOW RED GREEN BLUE ADJUST ORIGINAL Description Setting the N850 patch for the original for adjustment Setting the N500 patch for the original for adjustment Setting the N200 patch for the original for adjustment Setting the cyan patch for the original for adjustment Setting the magenta patch for the original for adjustment Setting the yellow patch for the original for adjustment Setting the red patch for the original for adjustment Setting the green patch for the original for adjustment Setting the blue patch for the original for adjustment Setting the main and auxiliary scanning directions
2. Select the item to be set. 3. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys. Display L a b Description Setting the L value Setting the a value Setting the b value Setting range 0.0 to 100.0 -200.0 to 200.0 -200.0 to 200.0
4. Press the start key. The value is set. 5. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop key. Setting: ADJUST ORIGINAL/MAIN 1. Measure distance from the left edge of the original for adjustment to the black band in three points. Measurement procedure 1) Measure the distances A (50 mm), B (105 mm) and C (190 mm) along the auxiliary scanning direction. 2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: ((A + C) / 2 + B) / 2 2. Enter the values solved using the +/- or numeric keys in [MAIN ADJ]. 3. Press the start key. The value is set. 4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop key. Setting: ADJUST ORIGINAL/SUB 1. Measure distance from the leading edge of the original for adjustment to the black band in three points. Measurement procedure 1) Measure the distances D (30 mm), E (148.5 mm) and C (267 mm) along the main scanning direction. 2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: ((D + F) / 2 + E) / 2 2. Enter the values solved using the +/- or numeric keys in [SUB ADJ]. 3. Press the start key. The value is set. 4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop key.
1-3-17
3JX Maintenance item No. U425 Setting: CIS 1. Select the item to be set. Display N950 N850 N770 N650 N500 N300 CYAN MAGENTA YELLOW RED GREEN BLUE Description Setting the N950 patch for the original for adjustment Setting the N850 patch for the original for adjustment Setting the N770 patch for the original for adjustment Setting the N650 patch for the original for adjustment Setting the N500 patch for the original for adjustment Setting the N300 patch for the original for adjustment Setting the cyan patch for the original for adjustment Setting the magenta patch for the original for adjustment Setting the yellow patch for the original for adjustment Setting the red patch for the original for adjustment Setting the green patch for the original for adjustment Setting the blue patch for the original for adjustment
Description
2. Select the item to be set. 3. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys. Display L a b Description Setting the L value Setting the a value Setting the b value Setting range 0.0 to 100.0 -200.0 to 200.0 -200.0 to 200.0
4. Press the start key. The value is set. 5. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop key. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-18
Description Checking/clearing counts by optional devices Description Displays or clears the counts of DP or finisher. Purpose To check the use of DP and finisher. Also to clear the counts after replacing consumable parts. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the device, the count of which is to be checked. The count of the selected device is displayed. Display DP FINISHER DP Display ADP RADP Finisher Display CP CNT STAPLE PUNCH STACK SADDLE Description No. of copies that has passed Frequency the stapler has been activated Frequency the punch has been activated Frequency the stacker has been activated Frequency the center holding has been activated Description No. of single-sided originals that has passed through the DP No. of double-sided originals that has passed through the DP Description Counts of DP Counts of finisher
Clearing 1. Select the item to be cleared. To clear the counts for all, press the clear key. 2. Press the start key. The count is cleared. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-19
Description Setting of amount of slack for feeding from DP Description Adjusts the amount of slack generated when the DP is used. Purpose Use this mode if an original non-feed jam, oblique feed or wrinkling of original occurs when the DP is used. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be adjusted. Display REGST REGST MIX 3. 4. 5. 6. Description Amount of slack in the reading original from the DP Amount of slack in the reading original from the DP in the auto selection mode Setting range -31 to 31 -31 to 31 Initial setting 0 0 Change in value per step 0.17 mm 0.17 mm
Press the system menu key. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy. Press the system menu key. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys. The greater the value, the larger the amount of slack; the smaller the value, the smaller the amount of slack. If an original non-feed jam or oblique feed occurs, increase the setting value. If wrinkling of original occurs, decrease the value. 7. Press the start key. The setting is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U990 Checking/clearing the time for the exposure lamp to light Description Displays, clears or changes the accumulated time for the exposure lamp to light. Purpose To check duration of use of the exposure lamp. Also to clear the accumulated time for the lamp after replacement. Method Press the start key. The accumulated time of illumination for the exposure lamp is displayed in minutes. Display CCD CIS Description Accumulated time for the exposure lamp Accumulated time for CIS
Clearing 1. Select the item to be cleared. 2. Press the start key. The accumulated time is cleared. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-20
3JX
1-4 Troubleshooting
1-4-1
Original misfeed detection
(1) Original misfeed indication When an original jams, the machine immediately stops operation and a message is shown on the machine operation panel. To remove the jammed original, open the top cover or reverse unit. Paper misfeed detection can be reset by opening and closing the respective covers to turn safety switch off and on.
(2) Original misfeed detection conditions
ORSW
OFSW
DPTSW2 DPTSW1
Figure 1-4-1
1-4-1
3JX Section DP Jam code 70 No original feed Conditions The original feed switch (OFSW) does not turn on within specified time during the first sheet feeding. The original feed switch (OFSW) does not turn on within specified time during the second sheet feeding. Specified time 2436 pulse 4430 pulse
71 DP timing switch 2 (DPTSW2) does not turn off within speci- 2500 pulse An original jam in the orig- fied time. inal feed/conveying section 1 72 The original feed switch (OFSW) and original registration An original jam in the orig- switch (ORSW) does not turn off within specified time. inal feed/conveying section 2 16675 pulse
73 DP timing switch 1 (DPTSW1) does not turn off within speci- 4979 pulse An original jam in the orig- fied time. inal conveying section 74 The original registration switch (ORSW) does not turn on An original jam in the orig- within specified time and after 5 retries. inal registration section 4979 pulse
75 The original registration switch (ORSW) does not turn off 19533 pulse An original jam in the orig- within specified time. inal registration section DP timing switch 1 (DPTSW1) does not turn on within speci- 4979 pulse fied time. 76 DP timing switch 2 (DPTSW2) does not turn on within speci- 2500 pulse An original jam in the orig- fied time. inal feed/conveying section 78 Document processor top cover open The top cover is opened during original feeding. -
1-4-2
3JX (3) Paper misfeeds Problem (1) An original jams in DP is indicated during copying (no original feed). Jam code 70 (2) An original jams in DP is indicated during copying (a jam in the original feed/conveying section). Jam code 71 (3) An original jams in DP is indicated during copying (a jam in the original feed/conveying section). Jam code 72 (4) An original jams in DP is indicated during copying (a jam in the original conveying section). Jam code 73 (5) An original jams in DP is indicated during copying (a jam in the original registration section). Jam code 74 (6) An original jams in DP is indicated during copying (a jam in the original registration section). Jam code 75 (7) An original jams in DP is indicated during copying (a jam in the original feed/conveying section). Jam code 76 Causes/check procedures Defective original feed switch. Check if the original feed motor malfunctions. Defective DP timing switch 2. Corrective measures Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original feed switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Run maintenance item U243 and select the original feed motor on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DP timing switch 2 on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Defective switch.
Run maintenance item U244 and turn switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Original feed switch, original registration switch
Defective DP timing switch 1.
Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DP timing switch 1 on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Defective original registration switch.
Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original registration switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Defective switch.
Run maintenance item U244 and turn switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Original registration switch, DP timing switch 1
Defective DP timing switch 2.
Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DP timing switch 2 on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
1-4-3
3JX
1-4-2
Self-diagnosis
(1) Self-diagnostic function This unit is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, copying is disabled and the problem displayed as a code consisting of C followed by a number, indicating the nature of the problem. A message is also displayed requesting the user to call for service. After removing the problem, the self-diagnostic function can be reset by turning safety switches off and back on.
(2) Self diagnostic codes Remarks Code C3210 Contents CIS lamp problem After the reading starting, when input value at the time of CIS illumination does not exceed the threshold value between 5 s. Causes Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check procedures/corrective measures Check the connection of connector on the main PWB and the connector on the DP main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation. Replace the DP inverter PWB and check for correct operation. Replace the CIS and check for correct operation. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation. Replace the CIS and check for correct operation. Replace the DP inverter PWB and check for correct operation. Check the connection of connector YC7 on the scanner PWB and the connector of the DP, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Replace the DP lift motor and check for correct operation. Replace the DP lift upper limit switch and check for correct operation. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation.
Defective DP main PWB. Defective DP inverter PWB. Defective CIS. C3310 CIS AGC problem After AGC, correct input is not obtained at CIS. Defective DP main PWB. CIS output problem. Defective DP inverter PWB. C9000 DP communication problem A communication error is detected. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Defective DP main PWB. C9040 DP lift motor going up error The pulse count raised to 10000 at lifting, however, the DP lift switch could not be turned on. After one time retry, the DP lift limit switch could not be turned on. Loose connection of the DP lift motor connector. Malfunction of the DP lift motor. Malfunction of the DP lift upper limit switch. Loose connection of the DP lift upper limit switch connector. Defective DP main PWB.
1-4-4
3JX Remarks Code C9050 Contents DP lift motor going down error The pulse count lowered to 10000 at lifting down, however, the DP bottom limit switch could not be turned on. After one time retry, the DP bottom limit switch could not be turned on. Causes Loose connection of the DP lift motor connector. Malfunction of the DP lift motor. Malfunction of the DP lift lower limit switch. Loose connection of the DP lift lower limit switch connector. Defective DP main PWB. C9060 DP EEPROM error Read and write data does not match. Data in the specified area of the backup memory does not match the specified values. Communication problem between DP and SHD A communication error is detected. Defective DP main PWB. Device damage of EEPROM. Loose connection of the SHD PWB. Defective SHD PWB. C9080 Communication problem between DP and CIS Reading cannot be performed correctly. Loose connection of CIS. Defective CIS. Check procedures/corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Replace the DP lift motor and check for correct operation. Replace the DP lift lower limit switch and check for correct operation. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation. Contact the Service Administrative Division.
C9070
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Replace the SHD PWB and check for correct operation. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Replace CIS and check for correct operation.
1-4-5
3JX
1-4-3
Electric problems
Troubleshooting to each failure must be in the order of the numbered symptoms. Problem (1) The original feed motor, original registration motor, original conveying motor or DP lift motor does not operate. Causes 1. Poor contact in the connector terminals. 2. Defective drive transmission system. 3. Defective motor. 4. Defective DP drive relay PWB. (2) A message indicating cover open is displayed when the DP is closed correctly. (3) An original jams when the main power switch is turned on. 1. Poor contact in the connector terminals. 2. Defective DP safety switch 1. Check procedures/corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not, grease the bushings and gears. Check for broken gears and replace if any. Run maintenance item U243 and check if the motor operates. If not, replace the motor. Run maintenance item U243 and check if the motor operates. If not, replace the DP drive relay PWB. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check for continuity across the contacts of the switch. If none when the switch is on, replace DP safety switch 1.
1. A piece of paper torn Remove any found. from copy paper is caught around original feed switch, original registration switch or DP timing switch 1/2. 2. Defective original feed switch, original registration switch or DP timing switch 1/2. Run maintenance item U244 and turn the switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
1-4-4
Mechanical problems
Problem Causes/check procedures The surfaces of the DP original feed belt, DP forwarding pulley or DP separation pulley are dirty with paper powder. Corrective measures Check and clean them with isopropyl alcohol if they are dirty.
(1) No primary original feed.
Check if the DP original feed belt, DP forward- If so, replace (see page 1-5-3). ing pulley or DP separation pulley is deformed. (2) No secondary original feed. (3) Originals jam. The registration pulley and the registration roller do not contact each other correctly. Originals outside the specifications are used. The surfaces of the DP original feed belt, DP forwarding pulley or DP separation pulley are dirty with paper powder. The eject pulley and the eject roller do not contact each other correctly. Check and clean them with isopropyl alcohol if they are dirty. Use only originals conforming to the specifications. Check and clean them with isopropyl alcohol if they are dirty. Check visually and remedy if necessary.
1-4-6
3JX
1-5-1
(1) Precautions Before starting disassembly, press the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the Power indicator and the Memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet. Turning off the main power switch before pressing the Power key to off may cause damage to the equipped hard disk. When handling PWBs (printed wiring boards), do not touch parts with bare hands. The PWBs are susceptible to static charge. Do not touch any PWB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge. When removing the hook of the connector, be sure to release the hook. Output cables from the main machine are non-LPS. Please use the item below Interconnenting cables. P/N: 303JX46010, 303JX46020 Circuit type: Non-LPS Circuit specs: 24V DC
1-5-1
3JX
1-5-2
Assembly and Disassembly
(1) Detaching and refitting the DP original feed belt and DP forwarding pulley Follow the procedure below to replace the DP original feed belt and DP forwarding pulley. Procedure 1. Open the top cover. 2. Remove two original feed belt shaft guides.
Top cover
Original feed belt shaft guides
Figure 1-5-1 3. Remove the stop ring and then remove the original feed unit from the DP.
Stop ring
Original feed unit
Figure 1-5-2 4. Remove the original feed belt unit from the inserted parts of the original feed unit.
Original feed unit
Original feed belt unit
Figure 1-5-3
1-5-2
3JX 5. Remove two stop rings from the original feed belt shaft A and then remove the bushing, pulley, spring pin, original feed holder and original feed color A. 6. Remove the original feed belt shaft A from the original feed belt unit. 7. Remove the original feed belt shaft B from the original feed belt unit. 8. Remove the original feed color B and DP original feed belt from original feed belt shaft B.
Stop ring Original feed belt shaft B Original feed color B Stop ring DP original feed belt
Original feed belt unit Bushing Pulley Spring pin Original feed holder Original feed color A Original feed belt shaft A
Figure 1-5-4 9. Remove two stop rings from the forwarding pulley shaft and then remove two pulleys, two spring pins and two bushings. 10. Pull out the forwarding pulley shaft and remove the DP forwarding pulley.
Stop ring Spring pin Original feed unit
Pulley Bushing Forwarding pulley shaft Bushing Pulley
Spring pin Stop ring DP forwarding pulley
Figure 1-5-5 11. Replace the DP original feed belt and DP forwarding pulley. 12. Install the DP forwarding pulley to the original feed unit. 13. Install the DP original feed belt to the original feed belt unit. 14. Refit the original feed belt unit to the original feed unit. 15. Refit the original feed unit to the DP.
1-5-3
3JX (2) Detaching and refitting the DP separation pulley Follow the procedure below to replace the DP separation pulley. Procedure 1. Open the top cover. 2. Release the inserted part and then remove the separation guide.
Separation guide
Inserted part
Figure 1-5-6
3. Remove the stop ring and then DP separation pulley and torque limiter. 4. Replace the DP separation pulley and install the pulley to the DP.
Torque limiter DP separation pulley Stop ring
Figure 1-5-7
1-5-4
3JX (3) Detaching and refitting the CIS Follow the procedure below to replace the CIS. Procedure 1. Open the top cover. 2. Release the screw and three inserted parts and then remove the DP front cover.
Screw
DP front cover
Figure 1-5-8
3. Remove two screws and then original feed guide.

Original feed guide
Figure 1-5-9
1-5-5
3JX
4. Remove the flexible flat cable from CIS relay PWB. 5. Remove the connector from the DP inverter PWB and release the wire from the wire saddle and edging.
DP inverter PWB
Flexible flat cable Connector
CIS relay PWB
Wire saddle
Edging
Figure 1-5-10
6. Open the reverse unit. 7. Remove the screw and then remove the original conveying guide. 8. Remove the connector of the DP timing switch 2.
DP timing switch 2
Connector
Original conveying guide
Figure 1-5-11
1-5-6
3JX
9. Remove two screws and then remove the reverse unit front cover.
Reverse unit front cover
Figure 1-5-12
10. Remove the screw and then remove the CIS. 11. Replace the CIS. Install the CIS to the DP. 12. Refit the reverse unit front cover to the DP. 13. Connect the connector of the DP timing switch 2 and refit the original conveying guide to the DP. 14. Connect the connector to the DP inverter PWB and the flexible flat cable to the CIS relay PWB. 15. Refit the original feed guide and the DP front cover to the DP.
Screw
CIS
CIS
Figure 1-5-13
1-5-7
3JX
1-5-8
3JX
2-1-1
The original placed on the original tray is fed sheet by sheet through the original feeding section and conveyed on the slit glass. Shortly after one side is scanned by the CCD over the slit glass, the original is scanned by the CIS. The original attached to the CIS is ejected to the original eject table after the second side is scanned by the CIS.
Figure 2-1-1 Document processor (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) Original tray Lift lever DP forwarding pulley Original feed color DP original feed belt Original feed color DP separation pulley Registration pulley Registration roller Original conveying pulley (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) Original conveying pulley Reading guide Original conveying roller Original conveying pulley CIS Eject roller Original conveying pulley Eject roller Eject pulley Original eject table
2-1-1
3JX
YC11-1,2,3,4 YC7-8 YC9-8 YC10-1,2,3,4
DPLM A/B/A_/B_ INV REM OFSW OFM A_/B_/A/B
YC9-5
ORSW OFM
YC10-5,6,7,8
ORM A_/B_/A/B
ORM ORSW
OFSW DPLM DPINPWB
YC10-9,10,11,12
OCM A_/B_/A/B OCM CIS DPTSW2 Image data YC8/YC9 DPMPWB YC5 YC6/YC7 Image data SPWB (machine) YC7 YC11 MPWB (machine) DPTSW1
YC9-2
DPTSW1
YC7-11
DPTSW2
YC2
YC1
DPDRPWB
Figure 2-1-2 Document processor block diagram
2-1-2
3JX
2-2-1
(1) PWBs
3 2 4 1
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-1 PWBs 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. DP main PWB (DPMPWB) .......................... Controls the image processing. DP drive relay PWB (DPDRPWB) ............... Controls electrical components. CIS relay PWB (CISRPWB)......................... Relay of image data. DP inverter PWB (DPINPWB)...................... Controls the light source of built-in CIS. LED PWB (LEDPWB) .................................. Indicates presence of originals or an original jam.
2-2-1
3JX (2) Switches and sensors
10 4 5 3 11 6 7
12 8 9
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-2 Switches and sensors 1. DP safety switch 1 (DPSSW1)..................... Breaks the safety circuit when the document processor is opened; resets original misfeed detection. 2. DP safety switch 2 (DPSSW2)..................... Breaks the safety circuit when the top cover is opened; resets original misfeed detection. 3. Original set switch (OSSW) ......................... Detects the presence of an original. 4. Original feed switch (OFSW) ....................... Detects primary original feed end timing. 5. Original registration switch (ORSW) ............ Detects the original conveying timing. 6. DP timing switch 1 (DPTSW1) ..................... Detects the original scanning timing. 7. DP timing switch 2 (DPTSW2) ..................... Detects the original scanning timing. 8. Original length size switch (OLSW) ............. Detects the length of the original. 9. Original width size switch (OWSW) ............. Detects the width of the original. 10. DP lift upper limit switch (DPLULSW) .......... Detects the original tray reaching the upper limit. 11. DP lift lower limit switch (DPLLLSW) ........... Detects the original tray reaching the lower limit. 12. CIS open/close switch (CISOCSW) ............. Detects the opening/closing of the top cover.
2-2-2
3JX (3) Others
1 2 4 7 3 5,6 8
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-3 Others 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Original feed motor (OFM) ........................... Drives the DP original feed belt. Original registration motor (ORM)................ Drives the registration roller. Original conveying motor (OCM) ................. Drives the original conveying sections. DP lift motor (DPLM) .................................... Operates the original tray. DP fan motor 1 (DPFM1) ............................. Cools the CIS. DP fan motor 2 (DPFM2) ............................. Cools the CIS. DP fan motor 3 (DPFM3) ............................. Cools the CIS. CIS (CIS)...................................................... Reads the image of originals.
2-2-3
3JX
2-2-4
3JX
2-3-1
DP main PWB
DPMPWB Image data MPWB (machine) ASIC (U7) 3.3V Image data Control signal Serial communication data Serial data
CISRPWB
Regulator (U4)
1.8V
12V
Regulator (U1)
CIS 5V
3.3V Serial communication data CPU (U1) 24V Regulator (U2) 12V
SPWB (machine)
Reset IC (U2)
RESET
5V 12V 24V R24V DPDRPWB DPINPWB
Figure 2-3-1 DP main PWB diagram
Control signal Sensor input signal
X2
U8 U9 U5 U15 U13 U11

1
U2 U6 X1 U3 U4
U7 U16
10
U1
5 3
U14
YC2
YC3
YC6
40
YC7
20
YC1
40
Figure 2-3-2 DP main PWB silk-screen diagram
U10
YC5
YC8
YC4
12
U12
14 1
YC9
2-3-1
3JX Connector YC1 Connected to the DP drive relay PWB Pin No. Signal 1 DPFM3 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 CISOCSW LED RD LED GN DPFM1 INV REM DPTSW2 OWSW OLSW DPLLLSW OSSW DPTSW1 ORSW OFSW DPLULSW DPLM 1 DPLM 0 DPLM B DPLM A OCM 1B OCM 0B OCM 1A OCM 0A OCM B OCM A ORM 1B ORM 0B ORM 1A ORM 0A ORM B ORM A OFM 1B I/O O I O O O O I I I I I I I I I O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Voltage 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Description DPFM3 On/Off CISOCSW On/Off LED RED control signal LED GREEN control signal DPFM1 On/Off CIS control signal DPTSW2 On/Off OWSW On/Off OLSW On/Off DPLLLSW On/Off OSSW On/Off DPTSW1 On/Off ORSW On/Off OFSW On/Off DPLULSW On/Off DPLM drive control signal DPLM drive control signal DPLM drive control signal DPLM drive control signal OCM drive control signal OCM drive control signal OCM drive control signal OCM drive control signal OCM drive control signal OCM drive control signal ORM drive control signal ORM drive control signal ORM drive control signal ORM drive control signal ORM drive control signal ORM drive control signal OFM drive control signal
2-3-2
3JX Connector YC1 Connected to the DP drive relay PWB Pin No. Signal 33 OFM 0B 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 YC3 Connected to the DP Safety switch 2 YC5 Connected to the machine 1 2 3 OFM 1A OFM 0A OFM B OFM A 3.3V G(5V) 5V G(5V) DPSSW2 5V I/O O O O O O O O I O Voltage 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 3.3 V DC 5 V DC 0/5 V DC 5 V DC Description OFM drive control signal OFM drive control signal OFM drive control signal OFM drive control signal OFM drive control signal 3.3 V DC power output Signal ground 5 V DC power output Signal ground DPSSW2 On/Off 5 V DC power output
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SSCLK SSDO SSDI SSEL SRDY OVSYNC FEED NC 3.3V 3.3V G(5V) G(5V) DOUTR7P DOUTR3P DOUTR7N DOUTR3N DOUTR6P DOUTR2P DOUTR6N
I O I I O O O I I O O O O O O O
0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse)
CLOCK signal from the machine Serial communication data signal to the machine Serial communication data signal from the machine SELECT signal from the machine READY signal to the machine OVSYNC signal to the machine FEED signal to the machine Not used 3.3 V DC power input 3.3 V DC power input Signal ground Signal ground Image data signal R7P Image data signal R3P Image data signal R7N Image data signal R3N Image data signal R6P Image data signal R2P Image data signal R6N
YC6 Connected to the machine
2-3-3
3JX Connector YC6 Connected to the machine Pin No. Signal 8 DOUTR2N 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 DOUTR5P DOUTR1P DOUTR5N DOUTR1N DOUTR4P DOUTR0P DOUTR4N DOUTR0N DOUTG7P DOUTG3P DOUTG7N DOUTG3N DOUTG6P DOUTG2P DOUTG6N DOUTG2N DOUTG5P DOUTG1P DOUTG5N DOUTG1N DOUTG4P DOUTG0P DOUTG4N DOUTG0N DOUTB7P I/O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Voltage 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Description Image data signal R2N Image data signal R5P Image data signal R1P Image data signal R5N Image data signal R1N Image data signal R4P Image data signal R0P Image data signal R4N Image data signal R0N Image data signal G7P Image data signal G3P Image data signal G7N Image data signal G3N Image data signal G6P Image data signal G2P Image data signal G6N Image data signal G2N Image data signal G5P Image data signal G1P Image data signal G5N Image data signal G1N Image data signal G4P Image data signal G0P Image data signal G4N Image data signal G0N Image data signal B7P
2-3-4
3JX Connector YC6 Connected to the machine Pin No. Signal 34 DOUTB3P 35 36 37 38 39 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 DOUTB7N DOUTB3N DOUTB6P DOUTB2P DOUTB6N DOUTB2N DOUTB5P DOUTB1P DOUTB5N DOUTB1N DOUTB4P DOUTB0P DOUTB4N DOUTB0N DOUTCLKP 3.3V DOUTCLKN DBCLK HSYNCP SGND HSYNCN SGND MREP VSYNC MREN SGND I/O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O I O O O O O O O Voltage 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Description Image data signal B3P Image data signal B7N Image data signal B3N Image data signal B6P Image data signal B2P Image data signal B6N Image data signal B2N Image data signal B5P Image data signal B1P Image data signal B5N Image data signal B1N Image data signal B4P Image data signal B0P Image data signal B4N Image data signal B0N DOUTCLK signal 3.3 V DC power input DOUTCLKN signal DBCLK signal HSYNCP signal Signal ground HSYNCN signal Signal ground MREP signal VSYNC signal MREN signal Signal ground
YC7 Connected to the machine
2-3-5
3JX Connector YC8 Connected to the CIS relay PWB Pin No. Signal 1 SDA2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 SDA+ SDBSDB+ SDCSDC+ SCLK1SCLK1+ SDDSDD+ SDESDE+ SCLK2SCLK2+ LST TINT RGOUT RGCLK RGLD RGRDWR RGDATA 5VON 12VON SGND I/O I I I I I I I I I I I I I I O O I O O O O O O Voltage 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Description Serial communication data signal Serial communication data signal Serial communication data signal Serial communication data signal Serial communication data signal Serial communication data signal Serial data clock signal Serial data clock signal Serial communication data signal Serial communication data signal Serial communication data signal Serial communication data signal Serial data clock signal Serial data clock signal LST signal TINT signal RGOUT signal RGCLK signal RGLD signal RGRDWR signal RGDATA signal 5VON signal 12VON signal Signal ground
YC9 Connected to the CIS relay PWB
2-3-6
3JX
2-3-2
DP drive relay PWB
DPLULSW
DPLLLSW
DPTSW1
DPTSW2
CIS
OWSW
ORSW
OSSW
OFSW
OLSW
LEDPWB CISRPWB DPDRPWB 24V Driver control signal Sensor input signal DPINPWB
Image data
12V Regulator (U2)
5V
Regulator (U1)
12V
DPFM1 DPFM2 DPFM3
DPMPWB Driver control signal CPU (U1) ASIC (U7) 1.8V Regulator (U4) Image data Sensor input signal Driver (U4) Driver (U3) Driver (U2) Driver (U1) R24V
DPLM ORM OFM OCM
3.3V 3.3V
A24V
12V
MPWB (machine)
SPWB (machine)
Figure 2-3-3 DP drive relay PWB diagram
24V
DPSSW1
5V
2-3-7
3JX
40 3 1
YC2
14
YC4 YC8
1
YC9
12 1
13
YC7
YC5 YC1
1 16 1 3
YC3
1 6 1
YC10
1 12
YC11
4
Figure 2-3-4 DP drive relay PWB silk-screen diagram
2-3-8
3JX Connector YC1 Connected to the machine Pin No. Signal 1 24V 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 YC2 Connected to the DP main PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 24V 24V A24V 12V 5V 5V G(24V) G(24V) G(24V) G(Analog) G(Analog) G(5V) G(5V) NC NC 5V G(5V) 3.3V OFM A OFM B OFM 0A OFM 1A OFM 0B OFM 1B ORM A ORM B ORM 0A ORM 1A ORM 0B ORM 1B OCM A OCM B OCM 0A I/O I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Voltage 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 12 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Description 24 V DC power input 24 V DC power input 24 V DC power input 24 V DC power input 12 V DC power input 5 V DC power input 5 V DC power input Power ground Power ground Power ground Analog ground Analog ground Signal ground Signal ground Not used Not used 5 V DC power input Signal ground 3.3 V DC power input OFM drive control signal OFM drive control signal OFM drive control signal OFM drive control signal OFM drive control signal OFM drive control signal ORM drive control signal ORM drive control signal ORM drive control signal ORM drive control signal ORM drive control signal ORM drive control signal OCM drive control signal OCM drive control signal OCM drive control signal
2-3-9
3JX Connector YC2 Connected to the DP main PWB Pin No. Signal 19 OCM 1A 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 YC3 Connected to the CIS relay PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 YC4 Connected to the CIS open/close switch YC5 Connected to the DP safety switch 1 1 2 3 OCM 0B OCM 1B DPLM A DPLM B DPLM 0 DPLM 1 DPLULSW OFSW ORSW DPTSW1 OSSW DPLLLSW OLSW OWSW DPTSW2 INV REM DPFM1 LED GN LED RD CISOCSW DPFM3 A24V A24V A12V A12V G(Analog) G(Analog) 24V NC R24V I/O I I I I I I I O O O O O O O O O I I I I O I O O O O O I Voltage 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 12 V DC 12 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC Description OCM drive control signal OCM drive control signal OCM drive control signal DPLM drive control signal DPLM drive control signal DPLM drive control signal DPLM drive control signal DPLULSW On/Off OFSW On/Off ORSW On/Off DPTSW1 On/Off OSSW On/Off DPLLLSW On/Off OLSW On/Off OWSW On/Off DPTSW2 On/Off CIS control signal DPFM1 On/Off LED GREEN control signal LED RED control signal CISOCSW On/Off DPFM3 On/Off 24 V DC power output 24 V DC power output 12 V DC power output 12 V DC power output Analog ground Analog ground 24 V DC power output Not used CISOCSW On/Off
1 2 3
R24V NC EJR24V
O I
24 V DC 0/24 V DC
24 V DC power output Not used DPSSW1 On/Off
2-3-10
3JX Connector YC7 Connected to the DP fan motor 1/ 2/3, DP inverter PWB and DP timing switch 2 Pin No. Signal 1 DPFM3 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 YC8 Connected to the original width size switch, original length size switch, DP lift lower limit switch, original set switch and LED PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 YC9 Connected to the DP timing switch 1, original registration switch, original feed switch and DP lift upper limit switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 12V DPFM2 R24V DPFM1 R24V G(24V) INV REM R24V G(5V) DPTSW2 5V NC OWSW 3.3V G(5V) OLSW 5V G(5V) DPLLLSW 5V G(5V) OSSW 5V LED RD G(5V) LED GN G(5V) DPTSW1 5V G(5V) ORSW 5V G(5V) OFSW 5V G(5V) DPLULSW 5V I/O O O O O O O O O I O I O I O I O I O O O I O I O I O I O Voltage 0/12 V DC 12 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 0/5 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC 0/5 V DC 5 V DC 0/5 V DC 5 V DC 0/5 V DC 5 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC 5 V DC 0/5 V DC 5 V DC 0/5 V DC 5 V DC 0/5 V DC 5 V DC Description DPFM3 On/Off 12 V DC power output DPFM2 On/Off 24 V DC power output DPFM1 On/Off 24 V DC power output Power ground CIS control signal 24 V DC power output Signal ground DPTSW2 On/Off 5 V DC power output Not used OWSW On/Off 3.3 V DC power output Signal ground OLSW On/Off 5 V DC power output Signal ground DPLLLSW On/Off 5 V DC power output Signal ground OSSW On/Off 5 V DC power output LED RED control signal Signal ground LED GREEN control signal Signal ground DPTSW1 On/Off 5 V DC power output Signal ground ORSW On/Off 5 V DC power output Signal ground OFSW On/Off 5 V DC power output Signal ground DPLULSW On/Off 5 V DC power output
2-3-11
3JX Connector YC10 Connected to the original feed motor, original registration motor and original conveying motor Pin No. Signal 1 OFM A_ 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 OFM B_ OFM A OFM B ORM A_ ORM B_ ORM A ORM B OCM A_ OCM B_ OCM A OCM B DPLM A DPLM B DPLM A_ DPLM B_ I/O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Voltage 0/5 V DC (pulse) 0/5 V DC (pulse) 0/5 V DC (pulse) 0/5 V DC (pulse) 0/5 V DC (pulse) 0/5 V DC (pulse) 0/5 V DC (pulse) 0/5 V DC (pulse) 0/5 V DC (pulse) 0/5 V DC (pulse) 0/5 V DC (pulse) 0/5 V DC (pulse) 0/5 V DC (pulse) 0/5 V DC (pulse) 0/5 V DC (pulse) 0/5 V DC (pulse) Description OFM drive control signal OFM drive control signal OFM drive control signal OFM drive control signal ORM drive control signal ORM drive control signal ORM drive control signal ORM drive control signal OCM drive control signal OCM drive control signal OCM drive control signal OCM drive control signal DPLM drive control signal DPLM drive control signal DPLM drive control signal DPLM drive control signal
YC11 Connected to the DP lift motor
2-3-12
3JX
2-3-3
CIS relay PWB
DPMPWB
CISRPWB Image data
ASIC (U7)
Control signal
Serial communication data CPU (U1) Control signal Regulator (U1) CIS
12V
5V
Control signal DPDRPWB 24V Regulator (U2) 12V
Figure 2-3-5 CIS relay PWB diagram
40
YC3
YC4
1 10 1 14
YC2
YC1
U2
U1
Figure 2-3-6 CIS relay PWB silk-screen diagram
2-3-13
3JX Connector YC1 Connected to the DP main PWB Pin No. Signal 1 SCLK2+ 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 YC2 Connected to the DP main PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 YC3 Connected to the DP drive relay PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 SCLK2SDE+ SDESDD+ SDDSCLK1+ SCLK1SDC+ SDCSDB+ SDBSDA+ SDASGND 12VON 5VON RGDATA RGRDWR RGLD RGCLK RGOUT TINT LST A24V A24V A12V A12V G(Analog) G(Analog) I/O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O I I I I I I O I I I I I I Voltage 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 24 V DC 24 V DC 12 V DC 12 V DC Description Serial data clock signal Serial data clock signal Serial communication data signal Serial communication data signal Serial communication data signal Serial communication data signal Serial data clock signal Serial data clock signal Serial communication data signal Serial communication data signal Serial communication data signal Serial communication data signal Serial communication data signal Serial communication data signal Signal ground 12VON signal 5VON signal RGDATA signal RGRDWR signal RGLD signal RGCLK signal RGOUT signal TINT signal LST signal 24 V DC power input 24 V DC power input 12 V DC power input 12 V DC power input Analog ground Analog ground
2-3-14
3JX Connector YC4 Connected to the CIS Pin No. Signal 1 AVSS 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 AVDD AVDD AVSS AVSS DVDD DVDD DVDD DVDD DVSS DVSS RGDATA RGRDWR RGLD RGCLK RGOUT TINT LST DVSS SCLK2+ SCLK2DVSS SDE+ SDEDVSS SDD+ SDDDVSS SCLK1+ SCLK1DVSS SDC+ SDCI/O O O O O O O O O O O I O O I I I I I I I I I I Voltage 12 V DC 12 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Analog ground 12 V DC power output 12 V DC power output Analog ground Analog ground 5 V DC power output 5 V DC power output 5 V DC power output 5 V DC power output Signal ground Signal ground RGDATA signal RGRDWR signal RGLD signal RGCLK signal RGOUT signal TINT signal LST signal Signal ground Serial data clock signal Serial data clock signal Signal ground Serial communication data signal Serial communication data signal Signal ground Serial communication data signal Serial communication data signal Signal ground Serial data clock signal Serial data clock signal Signal ground Serial communication data signal Serial communication data signal Description
2-3-15
3JX Connector YC4 Connected to the CIS Pin No. Signal 34 DVSS 35 36 37 38 39 40 SDB+ SDBDVSS SDA+ SDADVSS I/O I I I I Voltage 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Signal ground Serial communication data signal Serial communication data signal Signal ground Serial communication data signal Serial communication data signal Signal ground Description
2-3-16
3JX
2-4 Appendixes

Maintenance part name Name used in service manual DP original feed belt DP forwarding pulley DP separation pulley Original set switch Original feed switch Original registration switch DP timing switch 1 Felt Original conveying roller Registration roller Registration pulley Registration pulley Original conveying pulley Eject roller Eject roller Eject pulley Reading guide DP timing switch 2 CIS sheet CIS Original length size switch Original mat Name used in parts list BELT PF PULLEY LF PULLEY SEPARATION SENSOR,CONVEYING SWITCH REGISTRATION SWITCH REGISTRATION SWITCH REGISTRATION FELT PF COVER ROLLER CONVEYING ASSY ROLLER REGISTRATION PULLEY REGISTRATION PULLEY REG B PULLEY CONVEYING ROLLER EXIT ROLLER C MIDDLE PULLEY EXIT GUIDE READING SENSOR FEED A SHEET CIS ASS'Y SP SENSOR,A3 COLOR CIS SP SENSOR ORIGINAL MAT ASS'Y SP Part No. 303JX07330 3H607020 303JX07460 3H327410 2FG27110 2FG27110 2FG27110 303JX04150 303JX00020 303JX24050 303JX07080 303JX07340 303JX29160 303JX28040 303JX24090 303JX28030 303JX02120 303H327490 303JX94100 303JX94070 3H627240 303JX94090 Alternative part No. 3JX07330 3JX07460 3JX04150 3JX00020 3JX24050 3JX07080 3JX07340 3JX29160 3JX28040 3JX24090 3JX28030 3JX02120 3H327490 3JX94100 3JX94070 3JX94090 Fig. No. 5 5 4 3 5 5 5 5 4 4 5 5 2/5/6 6 4 4 2 4 6 4 3 1 Ref. No. 12 17 54 13 35 35 35 49 24 39 39 40 18/31/2 15 19 5 10 60 5 10 20 17
2-4-1
3JX

Maintenance part/location Test copy Perform at the maxiand test print mum copy size Section Method Clean Maintenance cycle Every service. Points and cautions Page
Section
Maintenance part/location
Method Replace Replace Replace Clean Clean Clean Clean Clean
Maintenance cycle 200 K 200 K 200 K Every service. Every service. Every service. Every service. Every service.
Points and cautions Replace. (Clean with alcohol when user call occurs.) Replace. (Clean with alcohol when user call occurs.) Replace. (Clean with alcohol when user call occurs.) Air blow or clean with a dry cloth. Air blow or clean with a dry cloth. Air blow or clean with a dry cloth. Air blow or clean with a dry cloth. Air blow or clean with a dry cloth.
Page P.1-5-2 P.1-5-2 P.1-5-4
Original feed DP original feed belt section DP forwarding pulley DP separation pulley Original set switch Original feed switch Original registration switch DP timing switch 1 Felt
Section
Maintenance part/location
Method
Maintenance cycle Every service Every service Every service Every service Every service Every service Every service Every service
Points and cautions Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol. Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol. Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol. Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol. Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol. Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol. Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol. Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
Page
Original con- Original conveying roller Clean veying section Registration roller Clean Registration pulley Original conveying pulley Eject roller Eject pulley Reading guide DP timing switch 2 Clean Clean Clean Clean Clean Clean
2-4-2
3JX
Section CIS section
Maintenance part/location CIS sheet CIS
Method Clean Clean
Maintenance cycle Every service Every service
Points and cautions Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol. Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol. (Do not clean with nor wet cloth)
Page
Maintenance part/location Original table Original length size switch Section
Method Clean
Maintenance cycle Every service
Points and cautions Air blow or clean with a dry cloth.
Page
Section Covers
Maintenance part/location Covers Slit glass*
Method Clean Check or clean Clean
Maintenance cycle Every service Every service
Points and cautions Clean with alcohol. Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol. (Do not clean with nor wet cloth) Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
Page
Original holder mat *Equipped with the machine.
Every service
Section Other
Maintenance part/location Image quality
Method Check and adjust
Points and cautions
Page
2-4-3
3JX
2-4-4
Wiring diagram
DPLULSW
24V
A24V 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 G(Analog) G(Analog) 12V 12V A24V A24V
12V
3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6
A24V
5V DPLULSW G(5V) 5V OFSW G(5V)
9-12 9-11 9-10 9-9 9-8 9-7 5V 9-6
12V
12V 12V G(Analog) G(Analog)
5V
DP top cover
AVSS P1-40 AVDD P1-39 AVDD P1-38 AVSS P1-37 5V 1-40 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-8 2-9 3.3V OFM A OFM B OFM 0A OFM 1A OFM 0B OFM 1B 2-10 ORM A ORM B 1-30 SCLK2+ SCLK2SDE+ SDESDD+ SDDSCLK1+ SCLK1SDC+ SDC- 1-10 SDB+ 1-11 SDB- 1-12 SDA+ 1-13 SDA- 1-14 1-9 8-6 8-5 8-4 8-3 8-2 8-1 1-8 8-7 1-7 8-8 1-6 8-9 SDDSCLK1+ SCLK1SDC+ SDCSDB+ SDBSDA+ SDA1-5 8-10 SDD+ 1-4 8-11 SDE1-3 8-12 SDE+ 1-2 8-13 SCLK21-1 8-14 SCLK2+ ORM 0A 1-29 ORM 1A 1-28 ORM 0B 1-27 ORM 1B 1-26 OCM A 1-25 OCM B 1-24 OCM 0A 1-23 OCM 1A 1-22 OCM 0B 1-21 OCM 1B 1-20 DPLM A 1-19 DPLM B 1-18 DPLM 0 1-17 DPLM 1 1-16 DPLULSW 1-15 SGND 12VON 5VON RGDATA RGRDWR RGLD RGCLK RGOUT TINT 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-8 2-9 LST 2-10 9-10 SGND 9-9 9-8 9-7 9-6 9-5 9-4 9-3 9-2 9-1 4-40 DVSS 12VON 5VON RGDATA RGRDWR RGLD RGCLK RGOUT TINT LST OFSW 1-14 ORSW 1-13 DPTSW1 1-12 OSSW 1-11 DPLLLSW 1-10 OLSW OWSW DPTSW2 INV REM DPFM1 LED GN LED RD CISOCSW DPFM3 1-9 1-8 1-7 1-6 1-5 1-4 1-3 1-2 1-1 2-11 ORM B 2-12 ORM 0A 2-13 ORM 1A 2-14 ORM 0B 2-15 ORM 1B 2-16 OCM A 2-17 OCM B 2-18 OCM 0A 2-19 OCM 1A 2-20 OCM 0B 2-21 OCM 1B 2-22 DPLM A 2-23 DPLM B 2-24 DPLM 0 2-25 DPLM 1 2-26 DPLULSW 2-27 OFSW 2-28 ORSW 2-29 DPTSW1 2-30 OSSW 2-31 DPLLLSW 2-32 OLSW 2-33 OWSW 2-34 DPTSW2 2-35 INV REM 2-36 DPFM1 2-37 LED GN 2-38 LED RD 2-39 CISOCSW 2-40 DPFM3 5V G(5V) G(5V) 1-39 3.3V 1-38 OFM A 1-37 OFM B 1-36 OFM 0A 1-35 OFM 1A 1-34 OFM 0B 1-33 OFM 1B 1-32 ORM A 1-31 AVSS P1-36 DVDD P1-35 DVDD P1-34 DVDD P1-33 DVDD P1-32 DVSS P1-31 DVSS P1-30 RGDATA P1-29 RGRDWR P1-28 RGLD P1-27 RGCLK P1-26 RGOUT P1-25 Tint P1-24 LST P1-23 DVSS P1-22 SCLK2+ P1-21 4-20 SCLK2+ 4-21 SCLK24-22 DVSS 4-23 SDE+ 4-24 SDE4-25 DVSS 4-26 SDD+ 4-27 SDD4-28 DVSS 4-29 SCLK1+ 4-30 SCLK14-31 DVSS 4-32 SDC+ 4-33 SDC4-34 DVSS 4-35 SDB+ 4-36 SDB4-37 DVSS 4-38 SDA+ 4-39 SDASCLK2- P1-20 DVSS P1-19 SDE+ P1-18 SDE- P1-17 DVSS P1-16 SDD+ P1-15 SDD- P1-14 DVSS P1-13 SCLK1+ P1-12 SCLK1- P1-11 DVSS P1-10 SDC+ P1-9 P1-8 P1-7 P1-6 P1-5 P1-4 P1-3 P1-2 P1-1 SDCDVSS SDB+ SDBDVSS SDA+ SDADVSS 4-19 DVSS 4-18 LST 4-17 TINT 4-16 RGOUT 4-15 RGCLK 4-14 RGLD 4-13 RGRDWR 4-12 RGDATA 4-11 DVSS 4-10 DVSS 4-9 DVDD 4-8 DVDD 4-7 DVDD 4-6 DVDD 4-5 AVSS 4-4 AVSS 4-3 AVDD 4-2 AVDD
4-1
AVSS
OFSW
2 3 1 2
ORSW
ORSW G(5V) 5V DPTSW1 G(5V)
9-5 9-4 9-3 9-2 9-1
3 1 2 3
DPTSW1
CISRPWB
LED GN G(5V) LED RD 5V DPLLLSW G(5V) 5V OLSW G(5V) 5V OSSW G(5V) 3.3V OWSW NC 5V DPTSW2 G(5V) R24V INV REM G(24V)
8-14 8-13 8-12 8-8 8-7 8-6 8-5 8-4 8-3 8-11 8-10 8-9 8-2 8-1 7-13
1-1 1-2 1-3
LED GN G(5V) LED RD
Original table
LEDPWB
DPLLLSW
1 2 3 1 2
CIS
1 2 3
3-3 3-2 3-1 5V
OLSW
3 1 2 5 4
1 2
DPDRPWB
OSSW
3 4 5 1
OWSW
2 1
1-1 1-2
3.3V OWSW
7-12 7-11 7-10 7-9 7-8 7-7
DPTSW2
Reverse unit
2 3 1 2 3
R24V REM
1 2
DPINPWB
G(24V)
2 1
R24V DPFM1
7-6 7-5
DPFM1
1 2 2 1
R24V DPSSW2 G(5V) DPFM2
7-4 7-3
DPFM2
1 2
DPSSW2
2 1
12V DPFM3
7-2 7-1
DPFM3
1 2 1
NC
DPMPWB
DRIVER
OFM A_ OFM B_ OFM A
10-1 10-2 10-3
-A
OFM
3 4 5
-B A
SSCLK 5-1 SSDO 5-2 SSDI 5-3 SSEL 5-4 SRDY 5-5 OVSYNC 5-6 FEED 5-7 NC 5-8 3.3V 5-9 3.3V 5-10 G(5V) 5-11 G(5V) 5-12
YC7 20P
YC6 40P
OFM B
10-4
6 1 2
NC NC ORM A_ ORM B_ ORM A 10-5 10-6 10-7 -A
ORM
3 4
-B A
DRIVER
SCSI 68P
ORM B
10-8
R24V NC EJR24V 24V NC R24V
24V 24V 24V A24V 12V 5V 5V G(24V) G(24V) G(24V) G(Analog) G(Analog) G(5V) G(5V) NC NC 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-7 1-8 1-9 1-10 1-11 1-12 1-13 1-14 1-15 1-16 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 PGND PGND DPEND DPSEL DPSDI 5V 3.3V 24V 24V 24V SGND SGND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 PGND PGND DPTMG DPRDY DPSCLK DPSDO 5V 3.3V 24V 12V SGND SGND SGND
NC
1 2
NC OCM A_ 10-9 -A
4-1 4-2 4-3
5-1 5-2 5-3
OCM B_ 10-10 OCM A 10-11 OCM B 10-12
-B
OCM
DRIVER
5 6
B NC
DPLM A DPLM B DPLM A_ DPLM B_
11-1 11-2 11-3 11-4
B_
2 3
B A
DPSSW1
DPLM
DRIVER
CISOCSW
A_
3JX
2-4-5
JS-700
3KB
CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications
1-2 Installation
1-2-1 Installation environment ..........................................................................................................................1-2-1 1-2-2 Unpacking ...............................................................................................................................................1-2-2 (1) Unpacking .........................................................................................................................................1-2-2

1-3-1 Maintenance mode .................................................................................................................................1-3-1 (1) Executing a maintenance item ..........................................................................................................1-3-1 (2) Contents of the maintenance mode items.........................................................................................1-3-2
1-4 Troubleshooting
1-4-1 Paper misfeed detection .........................................................................................................................1-4-1 (1) Paper misfeed indication ...................................................................................................................1-4-1 (2) Paper misfeed detection conditions ..................................................................................................1-4-1 (3) Paper misfeeds .................................................................................................................................1-4-2 1-4-2 Electric problems ....................................................................................................................................1-4-3 1-4-3 Mechanical problems ..............................................................................................................................1-4-4

2-1-1 Construction of each section...................................................................................................................2-1-1 (1) Switching the paper path...................................................................................................................2-1-2

2-3 Appendixes
Maintenance parts list .............................................................................................................................2-3-1 Periodic maintenance procedures ..........................................................................................................2-3-1 Wiring diagram........................................................................................................................................2-3-2
3KB
3KB
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1
Specifications
Type ................................................ Enclosed Number of trays .............................. 1 Tray capacity................................... 100 sheets (80 g/m2) Paper sizes ..................................... A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, Folio, LedgerR, LegalR, FoolscapR, OficioR, Letter, LetterR, Executive, ExecutiveR, StatementR Paper type ...................................... Paper weight: 45 to 160 g/m2 Paper types: plain, recycled, color, thin Power source.................................. Electrically connected to the machine Dimensions (W) x (D) x (H)............. 530 (W) x 475 (D) x 82 (H) mm 20 13/16" (W) x 18 11/16" (D) x 3 3/16" (H) Weight............................................. Approximately less than 1.5 kg/3.3 lbs
1-1-1
3KB
1-1-2
Parts names
Figure 1-1-1 1. 2. Job separator tray LED
1-1-2
3KB
1-1-3
Paper path
1-1-3
3KB
1-1-4
3KB
1-2 Installation
1-2-1
1.
1-2-1
3KB
1-2-2
Unpacking
(1) Unpacking
Figure 1-2-1 Unpacking 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Job separator Air-padded sheet Spacer LED PWB Conductible air-padded bag Job separator tray Installation guide 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Plastic bag Left front cover JS Air-padded bag TP Screw M3 x 05 Eject stopper Plastic bag Outer case Barcode labels
1-2-2
3KB
1-3-1
Maintenance mode
Start
Press the stop key.
Yes
No
Yes
End
1-3-1
3KB (2) Contents of the maintenance mode items Maintenance item No. U031 Description Checking switches for paper conveying Description Displays the on-off status of each paper detection switch on the paper path. Purpose To check if the switches for paper conveying operate correctly. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Turn each switch on and off manually to check the status. When a switch is detected to be in the ON position, the display for that switch will be highlighted. Display FEED1 FEED2 FEED3 MP TRAY REGIST EJECT BRANCH DUPLEX JOB SEPARATOR Switches Feed switch 1 (FSW1) Feed switch 2 (FSW2) Feed switch 3 (FSW3) MP feed switch (MPFSW) Registration switch (RSW) Eject switch (ESW) Feedshift switch (FSSW) Duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW) Job separator eject switch (JBESW)
Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U033 Checking solenoid operation Description Applies current to each solenoid in order to check its ON status. Purpose To check the operation of each solenoid. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the solenoid to be operated. 3. Press the start key. The solenoid turns on for 1 s. Display TONER BRANCH1 BRANCH2 MOTOR ON Solenoids Toner feed solenoid (TNFSOL) Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL)* Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL) The drive motor (DM) and the paper feed motor (PFM) are turned on.
*Solenoid of machine. To stop motor driving, press MOTOR ON again. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-2
3KB Maintenance item No. U342
Description Setting the ejection restriction Description Sets or cancels the restriction on the number of sheets to be ejected continuously when the internal eject tray is selected as the eject location. Purpose According to user request, sets or cancels restriction on the number of sheets. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select ON or OFF. Display ON OFF Description Sets restriction on the number of sheets Cancels restriction on the number of sheets
Initial setting: ON Details of restriction (number of sheets to be ejected continuously after the start key is pressed) Condition When no optional ejection device is installed When the job separator is installed When the finisher is installed Number of sheets 250 150 100
3. Press the start key. The setting is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-3
3KB
1-3-4
3KB
1-4 Troubleshooting
1-4-1
(1) Paper misfeed indication When paper jams, the machine immediately stops operation and the occurrence of a paper jam is indicated on the operation panel. To remove the jammed paper, open the conveying cover. To reset the paper misfeed detection, open and close the conveying cover to turn safety switch 2 off and on.
JBESW
FSSW
Figure 1-4-1
Section Job separator
Description 51 Misfeed in job separator eject section
Conditions The job separator eject switch (JBESW) does not turn on within specified time of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on. The job separator eject switch (JBESW) does not turn off within specified time of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning off. The job separator eject switch (JBESW) does not turn off within specified time of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on.
Specified time 2051 ms (30 ppm)/ 1587 ms (40/50 ppm) 2051 ms (30 ppm)/ 1587 ms (40/50 ppm) 2051 ms (30 ppm)/ 1587 ms (40/50 ppm)
1-4-1
3KB (3) Paper misfeeds Problem (1) Paper jams when the main power switch is turned on. Causes/check procedures A piece of paper torn from paper is caught around the job separator eject switch. Defective switch. Corrective measures Check visually and remove it, if any.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Feedshift switch, job separator eject switch Check visually and replace switch.
(2) A paper jam in the eject section is indicated during copying (jam in optional job separator eject section). Jam code 51
Broken feedshift switch or job separator eject switch actuator. Defective switch.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Feedshift switch, job separator eject switch
1-4-2
3KB
1-4-2
Electric problems
Troubleshooting to each failure must be in the order of the numbered symptoms. Problem (1) The feedshift solenoid does not operate. Causes 1. Broken solenoid coil. 2. Poor contact in the connector terminals. 3. Defective engine PWB. Check procedures/corrective measures Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the solenoid. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Run maintenance item U033 and check if the feedshift solenoid operates. If not, replace the engine PWB.
1-4-3
3KB
1-4-3
Mechanical problems
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures
(1) Paper jams.
Check if the contact between the job eject pul- Check and remedy. leys and job eject roller is correct. Grease the bushings and gears.
(2) Check if the job eject pulleys, job eject roller Abnormal noise is heard. and gears operate smoothly.
1-4-4
3KB
2-1-1
Construction of each section
The job separator consists of the components shown in Figure 2-1-1. It switches the paper path to eject printed paper to the job separator tray.
Figure 2-1-1 Job separator (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Job eject roller Job eject pulleys Job separator tray Job separator eject switch (JBESW) Ejected paper detection switch (EPDSW)
EPDSW JBESW
FSSOL
YC17-11,12
YC17-1
Machine EPWB
Figure 2-1-2 Job separator block diagram
YC17-7
2-1-1
3KB (1) Switching the paper path If the job separator is selected for the eject location, when a print is made, the feedshift solenoid (FSSOL) turns on and the feedshift guide of the machine operates to switch the paper path to the job separator. The printed paper is conveyed to the job separator and then ejected to the job separator tray.
Feedshift solenoid
Job separator tray Feedshift guide (FSSOL:ON)
Figure 2-1-3
2-1-2
3KB
2-2-1
2 1 3 4
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-1 1. 2. 3. 4. Job separator eject switch (JBESW)............ Detects a paper jam in the job separator. Ejected paper detection switch (EPDSW).... Detects the presence of paper on the job separator tray. Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL)......................... Operates the feedshift guide of the machine. LED .............................................................. Indicates the presence of paper on the job separator tray.
2-2-1
3KB
2-2-2
3KB
2-3 Appendixes
Maintenance parts list

Maintenance part name Name used in service manual Job eject roller Job eject pulleys Name used in parts list ROLLER,EJECT PULLEY,BRANCH Part No. 303B620011 3BN08100 Alternative part No. 3B620011 Fig. No. 1 1 Ref. No. 15 25

Section Paper conveying section Maintenance part/location Job eject roller Method Clean Check and clean Clean Check and clean Maintenance cycle Every service User call Every service User call Points and cautions Clean with alcohol. Page
Job eject pulleys
Clean with alcohol.
2-3-1
3KB
2-3-2
Wiring diagram
Machine EPWB
1 2 3
1 2 3
FSSOL 2 1 1 2 EPDSW LEDPWB
3 2 1
3 2 1
YC17 24VR JCT SOL1 JCT SOL2 5V LED 5V EPDSW SG DETECTION SG SG 5V JBESW 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 1 2 3 1 2 JBESW 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DF-720
3J3
CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications
1-2 Installation
1-2-1 Installation environment ..........................................................................................................................1-2-1 1-2-2 Unpacking ...............................................................................................................................................1-2-2 (1) Unpacking .........................................................................................................................................1-2-2 (2) Remove the tapes .............................................................................................................................1-2-3

1-3-1 Maintenance mode .................................................................................................................................1-3-1 (1) Executing a maintenance item ..........................................................................................................1-3-1 (2) Contents of the maintenance mode items.........................................................................................1-3-2
1-4 Troubleshooting

1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly............................................................................................1-5-1 (1) Precautions .......................................................................................................................................1-5-1 (2) Adjusting the positions of the front side registration cursor, rear side registration cursor and trailing edge registration cursor (reference) ......................................................................................1-5-2 (3) Cleaning the staple............................................................................................................................1-5-3 (4) Adjusting the pressure of curl eliminator mechanism........................................................................1-5-4

2-1-1 Construction of each section...................................................................................................................2-1-1 (1) Paper conveying operation in sort mode...........................................................................................2-1-2 2-1-2 Intermediate tray section.........................................................................................................................2-1-3 (1) Paper registration on the intermediate tray .......................................................................................2-1-4 2-1-3 Stapler section ........................................................................................................................................2-1-5

2-2-1 Electrical parts layout..............................................................................................................................2-2-1 (1) Paper conveying section ...................................................................................................................2-2-1 (2) Intermediate tray section ...................................................................................................................2-2-2 (3) Stapler section...................................................................................................................................2-2-3

2-3-1 Finisher control PWB ..............................................................................................................................2-3-1
2-4 Appendixes
Maintenance parts list .............................................................................................................................2-4-1 Periodic maintenance procedures ..........................................................................................................2-4-1 Wiring diagram........................................................................................................................................2-4-2
3J3
3J3
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1
Specifications
Type ................................................ Built-in Number of trays .............................. 1 (finisher tray) Tray capacity................................... When NOT stapling A3, B4, Ledger, Legal, Folio, Officio: 250 sheets A4, A4R, B5, Letter, LetterR: 500 sheets When stapling 2 to 4 pages: 130 sheets When stapling 5 pages or more: 250 sheets Stapling capacity ............................. A4/Letter or smaller: 30 sheets Other sizes than above: 20 sheets Paper size....................................... A3 to B5, Folio, Ledger, Letter, Legal and Officio Power source.................................. Electrically connected to the machine Dimension (W) x (D) x (H) .............. 310 (W) x 410 (D) x 160 (H) mm 12 3/16" (W) x 16 1/8" (D) x 6 1/4" (H) Weight............................................. Approximately less than 9 kg/19.84 lbs
1-1-1
3J3
1-1-2
Parts names
Figure 1-1-1 1. 2. 3. Intermediate tray JAM release lever Finisher tray
1-1-2
3J3
1-1-3
Paper path
Figure 1-1-2 Machine cross section 1. 2. 3. Paper conveying section Intermediate tray section Eject section
1-1-3
3J3
1-1-4
3J3
1-2 Installation
1-2-1
1.
1-2-1
3J3
1-2-2
Unpacking
(1) Unpacking
Figure 1-2-1 Unpacking 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Paper conveying unit Plastic bag Paper conveying unit pad Intermediate tray Plastic sheet Stapler cover Plastic bag Stapler cover spacer Large eject cover Plastic bag Front eject cover Plastic bag Rear eject cover Plastic bag 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. Finisher tray Air-padded bag Finisher tray spacer Staple cartridge Air-padded bag Flat spring ejection Ground plate TP screws M3 x 05 Operation section securing pin Plastic bag Installation guide PULL label Plastic bag Sub tray 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. Air-padded bag Cover spacer Outer case Stays Paper conveying unit side spacer Paper conveying unit upper spacer Intermediate tray lower spacer Intermediate tray upper spacer Barcode labels
Caution: Place the machine on a level surface. 1-2-2
3J3 (2) Remove the tapes When installing the finisher to the machine, be sure to remove the following tapes. 1. Remove two tapes holding the finisher tray.
Tape
Tape
Finisher tray
Figure 1-2-2
1-2-3
3J3
1-2-4
3J3
1-3-1
Maintenance mode
Start
Press the stop key.
Yes
No
Yes
End
1-3-1
3J3 (2) Contents of the maintenance mode items Maintenance item No. U019 Description Displaying the ROM version Description Displays the part number of the ROM fitted to each PWB. Purpose To check the part number or to decide, if the newest version of ROM is installed. Method 1. Press the start key. The ROM version are displayed. 2. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys Display MAIN MMI ENGINE ENGINE BOOT SCANNER OPTION LANGUAGE DICTIONARY DP LCF OPTION CASSETTE DF MAIN DF MTRAY DF SADDLE DF MAILBOX INNER DF SIMPLE DF MAIN FAX BOOT1 FAX APL1 FAX IPL1 FAX BOOT2 FAX APL2 FAX IPL2 Description Main PWB ROM IC Operation PWB ROM IC Engine PWB ROM IC Engine PWB booting Scanner PWB ROM IC Optional language ROM IC Optional DP main PWB ROM IC Optional 3000-sheet paper feeder main PWB ROM IC Optional paper feeder main PWB ROM IC Optional 3000-sheet document finisher main PWB ROM IC Optional 3000-sheet document finisher internal tray PWB ROM IC Optional centerfold main PWB ROM IC Optional mail box main PWB ROM IC Built-in finisher control PWB ROM IC Optional document finisher main PWB ROM IC Optional fax control PWB booting Optional fax control PWB application Optional fax control PWB IPL -
1-3-2
3J3 Maintenance item No. U033
Description Checking solenoid operation Description Applies current to each solenoid in order to check its ON status. Purpose To check the operation of each solenoid. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the solenoid to be operated. 3. Press the start key. The solenoid turns on for 1 s. Display TONER BRANCH1 BRANCH2 MOTOR ON Solenoids Toner feed solenoid (TNFSOL) Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL)* Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL) The drive motor (DM) and the paper feed motor (PFM) are turned on.
*Solenoid of machine. To stop motor driving, press [MOTOR ON] again. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U236 Setting the limit for the ejection section of the built-in finisher Description Sets whether A5R/B5R/statement size paper is output to the machine eject tray or not. Purpose If paper jams occur due to curling of paper in the built-in ejection section when duplex copying onto A5R/B5R/ statement size paper is performed, this mode is used to change the setting to ON to disable ejection to the machine eject tray. Method Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select ON or OFF. Display ON OFF Description Does not eject to the machine eject tray. Eject to the machine eject tray.
Initial setting: OFF 3. Press the start key. The setting is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-3
3J3 Maintenance item No. U246
Description Setting the finisher Description Provides various settings for the built-in finisher, if furnished. Purpose Adjusts the side registration cursor stop position if paper registration is poor or stapling is made outside the specified area. Start 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be set. The screen for setting each item is displayed. Display FINISHER 3000 BOOKLET FOLDER FINISHER B-IN Description Adjustment of the 3000-sheet document finisher Adjustment of the centerfold unit Adjustment of the built-in finisher
Setting the side registration cursor stop position 1. Select the desired cursor position. 2. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Display FRONT REAR END Description Front side registration cursor stop position Rear side registration cursor stop position Trailing edge registration cursor stop position Setting range -4 to +4 -4 to +4 -4 to +4 Initial setting 0 0 0
3. Press the start key. The value is set. 4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop key. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U342 Setting the ejection restriction Description Sets or cancels the restriction on the number of sheets to be ejected continuously when the internal eject tray is selected as the eject location. Purpose According to user request, sets or cancels restriction on the number of sheets. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select ON or OFF. Display ON OFF Description Sets restriction on the number of sheets Cancels restriction on the number of sheets
Initial setting: ON Details of restriction (number of sheets to be ejected continuously after the start key is pressed) Condition When no optional ejection device is installed When the job separator is installed When the finisher is installed Number of sheets 250 150 100
1-3-4
3J3
1-4 Troubleshooting
1-4-1
(1) Paper misfeed indication When paper jams, the machine immediately stops operation and the occurrence of a paper jam is indicated on the operation panel. To remove the jammed paper, lower the intermediate tray. To reset the paper misfeed detection, detach and refit the intermediate tray to turn the tray open/close switch off and on. (2) Paper misfeed detection conditions
PCSW
Figure 1-4-1
Section
Description
Conditions The paper conveying switch (PCSW) is not turned on even if a specified time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was received. The paper conveying switch (PCSW) does not turn off within specified time of its turning on when paper is conveyed to the intermediate tray from the paper conveying unit.
Specified time 1573 ms (30 ppm) 1217 ms (40/50 ppm) Paper length + 1123 ms (30 ppm) Paper length + 869 ms (40/50 ppm) 600 ms
Built-in fin- 81 isher Paper conveying sensor nonarrival jam
82 Jam in stapler 83 Eject jam
The staple home position sensor (STHPS) is not turned on within the specified time when driving the staple motor (STM). The paper conveying switch (PCSW) does not turn off within specified time of its turning on when paper is ejected to the finisher tray from the intermediate tray. Paper ejection is not output from the machine to the document finisher within specified time of the intermediate tray sensor (ITS) turning on.
Paper length + 1123 ms (30 ppm) Paper length + 869 ms (40/50 ppm) 1573 ms (30 ppm) 1217 ms (40/50 ppm)
96 Jam between the builtin finisher and machine
1-4-1
3J3 (3) Paper misfeeds Problem (1) A paper jam in builtin finisher is indicated as soon as the main power switch is turned on. Causes/check procedures A piece of paper torn from copy paper is caught around the paper conveying switch. Defective paper conveying switch. Corrective measures Check visually and remove it, if any.
With 5 V DC present at YC2-23 on the finisher control PWB, check if YC2-21 on the finisher control PWB remains low when the paper conveying switch is turned on and off. If it does, replace the paper conveying switch. Change the paper. With 5 V DC present at YC2-23 on the finisher control PWB, check if YC2-21 on the finisher control PWB remains low or high when the paper conveying switch is turned on and off. If it does, replace the paper conveying switch. Check and remedy.
(2) A paper jam in builtin finisher is indicated during copying (paper jam during paper insertion to the finisher). Jam code 81 (3) A paper jam in builtin finisher is indicated during copying (finisher stapler jam). Jam code 82 (4) A paper jam in builtin finisher is indicated during copying (eject jam). Jam code 83
Extremely curled paper. Defective paper conveying switch.
Check if the feedshift roller or feedshift pulley is deformed. The stapler is blocked with a staple. Defective stapler section.
Remove the stapler cartridge, and check the cartridge and the stapling section of the stapler. Remove the staple if any. With 5 V DC present at YC2-24 on the finisher control PWB, check if YC2-19 on the finisher control PWB remains low or high. If it does, replace the stapler section. With 5 V DC present at YC2-23 on the finisher control PWB, check if YC2-21 on the finisher control PWB remains low when the paper conveying switch is turned on and off. If it does, replace the paper conveying switch. Check and remedy.
Defective paper conveying switch.
Check if the feedshift roller or feedshift pulley is deformed. Defective intermediate tray sensor.
(5) A paper jam in builtin finisher is indicated during copying (jam between finisher and machine). Jam code 96
With 5 V DC present at YC3-1 on the finisher control PWB, check if YC3-2 on the finisher control PWB remains low or high when the intermediate tray sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the intermediate tray sensor.
1-4-2
3J3
1-4-2
Self-diagnosis
(1) Self-diagnostic function This unit is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, copying is disabled and the problem displayed as a code consisting of C followed by a number, indicating the nature of the problem. A message is also displayed requesting the user to call for service. After removing the problem, the self-diagnostic function can be reset by turning the tray open/close switch or machine safety switch 1 or 2 off and back on. (2) Self diagnostic codes Remarks Code C8170 Contents Finisher front side registration motor problem When the front-side registration homeposition sensor is turned on during initialization, the sensor did not turn on while it has moved by 106 pulses. When the front-side registration homeposition sensor is turned off during initialization, the sensor did not turn on in three seconds. Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
The front side reg- Reinsert the connector. Also check for contiistration motor con- nuity within the connector cable. If none, nector makes poor remedy or replace the cable. contact. Defective front side registration motor. The front side registration home position sensor connector makes poor contact. Defective front side registration home position sensor. Defective finisher control PWB. Replace front side registration motor. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Replace the front side registration home position sensor. Replace the finisher control PWB and check for correct operation.
C8180
Finisher rear side registration motor problem When the rear-side registration homeposition sensor is turned on during initialization, the sensor did not turn on while it has moved by 106 pulses. When the rear-side registration homeposition sensor is turned off during initialization, the sensor did not turn on in three seconds.
The rear side regReinsert the connector. Also check for contiistration motor con- nuity within the connector cable. If none, nector makes poor remedy or replace the cable. contact. Defective rear side registration motor. The rear side registration home position sensor connector makes poor contact. Defective rear side registration home position sensor. Defective finisher control PWB. Replace rear side registration motor. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Replace the rear side registration home position sensor. Replace the finisher control PWB and check for correct operation.
1-4-3
3J3 Remarks Code C8190 Contents Finisher trailing edge registration motor problem When the trailing edge registration home-position sensor is turned on during initialization, the sensor did not turn on while it has moved by 106 pulses. When the trailing edge registration home-position sensor is turned off during initialization, the sensor did not turn on in three seconds. Causes The trailing edge registration motor connector makes poor contact. Defective trailing edge registration motor. The trailing edge registration home position sensor connector makes poor contact. Defective trailing edge registration home position sensor. Defective finisher control PWB. C8210 Finisher stapler problem The stapler home position sensor does not change state from nondetection to detection within 200 ms of the start of stapler motor counterclockwise (forward) rotation. During initialization, the stapler home position sensor does not change state from non-detection to detection within 600 ms of the start of stapler motor clockwise (reverse) rotation. The stapler connector makes poor contact. The stapler is blocked with a staple. The stapler is broken. Defective finisher control PWB. Check procedures/corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Replace trailing edge registration motor.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Replace the trailing edge registration home position sensor.
Replace the finisher control PWB and check for correct operation. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Remove the stapler cartridge, and check the cartridge and the stapling section of the stapler. Replace the front stapler and check for correct operation. Replace the finisher control PWB and check for correct operation.
1-4-4
3J3
1-4-3
Electric problems
Troubleshooting to each failure must be in the order of the numbered symptoms. Problem (1) The paper conveying motor does not operate. Causes 1. Poor contact in the connector terminals. 2. Broken motor coil. 3. Defective drive transmission system. (2) The feedshift solenoid does not operate. 1. Broken solenoid coil. 2. Poor contact in the connector terminals. 3. Defective engine PWB. (3) The pickup solenoid does not operate. 1. Broken solenoid coil. 2. Poor contact in the connector terminals. 3. Defective finisher control PWB. Check procedures/corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the motor. Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not, grease the bushings and gears. Check for broken gears and replace if any. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the solenoid. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Run maintenance item U033 and check if the solenoid operates. If not, replace the engine PWB. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the solenoid. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check if YC2-2 on the finisher control PWB goes low. If not, replace the finisher control PWB.
1-4-5
3J3
1-4-4
Mechanical problems
Problem Causes/check procedures Check if the contact between the feedshift roller and feedshift pulleys is correct. Check if the contact between the feedshift roller and press roller is correct. Check if the contact between the eject roller and eject pulleys is correct. Corrective measures Check and remedy. Check and remedy. Check and remedy. Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
(1) Paper jams.
(2) Check if the rollers and gears operate Abnormal noise is heard. smoothly.
1-4-6
3J3
1-5-1
(1) Precautions Before starting disassembly the finisher, press the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the Power indicator and the Memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet. Turning off the main power switch before pressing the Power key to off may cause damage to the equipped hard disk. When optional fax kit is installed, be sure to disconnect the modular code before starting disassembly. When handling PWBs (printed wiring boards), do not touch parts with bare hands. The PWBs are susceptible to static charge. Do not touch any PWB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge. Use only the specified parts to replace the fuser unit thermostat. Never substitute electric wires, as the machine may be seriously damaged. When replacing battery on a PWB, dispose properly according to laws and regulations. When removing the hook of the connector, be sure to release the hook.
1-5-1
3J3 (2) Adjusting the positions of the front side registration cursor, rear side registration cursor and trailing edge registration cursor (reference) Perform the following adjustment if paper registration is poor or stapling is made outside the specified area. Procedure
Start Make a test copy in staple-sort mode. Staple 5 4.0 mm
Is the paper registration good? Yes Is the stapling position correct? See Figure 1-5-1. Yes
No
5 4.0 mm
Figure 1-5-1 Stapling position

No
Enter maintenance mode. Enter 246 using the numeric keys. Press the start key. Press [FINISHER B IN]. Select the item to be adjusted. Change the setting using the cursor up/down or numeric keys. Press the start key. The new setting is stored. Press the stop key to exit maintenance mode. FRONT: Stop position of the front side registration cursor REAR: Stop position of the rear side registration cursor END: Stop position of the trailing edge registration cursor Setting range: -4 to 4 Reference: 0 Changing the value by 1 changes the position by 0.556 mm. Increasing the value moves the front or rear side registration cursor or trailing edge registration cursor outward ( ); decreasing the value moves each cursor inward ( ). See Figure 1-5-2.
End
Trailing edge registration cursor Rear side registration cursor
Front side registration cursor
Figure 1-5-2
1-5-2
3J3 (3) Cleaning the staple During periodic maintenance, remove all the staples remaining inside the machine due to failure of stapling. Procedure 1. Open the front and conveying covers of the machine. 2. Open the stapler cover and then remove the staple cartridge. 3. Remove the stapler holder. 4. Remove five screws securing the stapler cover and then the cover. 5. Remove the staples attracted to the magnet on the inside of the stapler cover.
Stapler cover
Staple
Staple cartridge Magnet
Figure 1-5-3 6. Refit the stapler cover. 7. Refit the staple cartridge and close the stapler cover. 8. Refit the stapler holder. 9. Close the conveying front and covers.
1-5-3
3J3 (4) Adjusting the pressure of curl eliminator mechanism Increase the pressure of the curl eliminator mechanism to reduce upward curling of paper stacked on the intermediate tray if a paper jam occurs when batch ejection is performed because of strong upward curling. Procedure 1. Remove the paper conveying unit from the machine. 2. Loosen each two screws from the front and rear curl eliminator pressure adjusting plates respectively and then remove the plates. 3. Refit the all removed parts.
Curl eliminator pressure adjusting plate
Paper conveying unit
Curl eliminator pressure adjusting plate
Figure 1-5-4
1-5-4
3J3
2-1-1
Construction of each section
The paper conveying section consists of the components shown in Figure 2-1-1. It switches the path for the paper conveyed from the machine in sort mode. Also the paper conveying section contains a curl eliminator mechanism, which reduces curling of paper with curl eliminator rollers.
Figure 2-1-1 Paper conveying section (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) Feedshift pulleys Feedshift roller Press roller Press roller lift Stopper Upper curl eliminator roller Lower curl eliminator roller Feedshift claw (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) Small feedshift claw Eject roller Eject pulleys Paper conveying switch (PCSW) Upper guide plate Lower guide plate Tray open/close switch (TOCSW)
FSSOL
PUSOL
PCM PCSW
TOCSW
YC2-1,3
YC5-2
YC2-21
FINPWB
Figure 2-1-2 Paper conveying section block diagram
YC2-4,6,8,10
YC2-2
2-1-1
3J3 (1) Paper conveying operation in sort mode In the sort mode, the feedshift solenoid (FSSOL) turns on and the feedshift guide of the machine operates to switch the paper path to the paper conveying unit. After curling of the conveyed paper is eliminated by the curl eliminator rollers, the paper is conveyed to the intermediate tray by the feedshift roller. When the trailing edge registration cursor of the intermediate tray shifts the paper stocked in the intermediate tray to the stopper, the pickup solenoid (PUSOL) turns on to lift the press roller and release the stopper. The stack of paper on the intermediate tray is ejected to the finisher tray by the feedshift roller and eject roller.
Feedshift pulleys Feedshift solenoid Upper curl eliminator Feedshift roller roller
To intermediate tray
Lower curl eliminator roller
Press roller Stopper (PUSOL:OFF) Feedshift guide (FSSOL:ON)
Small feedshift claw Eject pulleys Feedshift claw
Feedshift pulley Pickup solenoid Feedshift roller
To finisher tray
Eject roller
Stopper (PUSOL:ON)
Press roller
Figure 2-1-3
2-1-2
3J3
2-1-2
Intermediate tray section
The intermediate tray section consists of the components shown in Figure 2-1-4. It stores and evens up the paper conveyed from the paper conveying section and returns the stack of paper to the paper conveying section.
Intermediate tray Trailing edge registration cursor
Rear side registration cursor
Figure 2-1-4 Intermediate tray section

SRFHPS SRRHPS TERHPS
FSRM
RSRM
TERM
YC4-11,13,14,15
YC4-1,3,4,5
YC3-5
YC5-5
YC4-6,8,9,10
Figure 2-1-5 Intermediate tray section block diagram
YC5-8
FINPWB
2-1-3
3J3 (1) Paper registration on the intermediate tray In sort mode, the front and rear side registration cursors move to the size of the paper used to even up the sides of the stack of paper and the trailing edge registration cursor shifts the paper to the paper conveying section. In staple-sort mode, the front and rear side registration cursors even up the sides of the stack of paper and shift the stack toward the machine front, and then the trailing edge registration cursor shifts the stack to the stapling position.
Home positions
Trailing edge registration cursor
Rear side registration cursor
Paper registration
Shifting the paper to the stapling position
Figure 2-1-6
2-1-4
3J3
2-1-3
Stapler section
In staple-sort mode, paper stocked on the intermediate tray is stapled by the stapler. The stapler motor (STM) drives the stapler cam via the stapler drive gear to staple paper.
Stapler drive gear Stapler self-priming sensor Stapler motor Stapler cam Stapler cam
Figure 2-1-7 Stapler section
STES
STCS YC2-13 YC2-15 STHPS YC2-19
STM
STSPS
YC2-12,14,16,18 YC2-17
FINPWB
Figure 2-1-8 Stapler section block diagram
2-1-5
3J3
2-1-6
3J3
2-2-1
(1) Paper conveying section
3 4 1 2 5
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-1 Paper conveying section 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Paper conveying motor (PCM)..................... Drives the paper conveying section. Paper conveying switch (PCSW) ................. Detects a paper jam in the finisher. Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL)......................... Operates the feedshift guide of the machine. Pickup solenoid (PUSOL) ............................ Operates the press roller. Tray open/close switch (TOCSW)................ Detects if the intermediate tray is opened or closed.
2-2-1
3J3 (2) Intermediate tray section
2 1 5 7,8 3,4 6
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-2 Intermediate tray section 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Finisher control PWB (FINPWB).................. Controls electrical components. Intermediate tray sensor (ITS) ..................... Detects the presence of paper on the intermediate tray. Trailing edge registration motor (TERM)...... Drives the trailing edge registration cursor. Front side registration motor (FSRM) .......... Drives the front side registration cursor. Rear side registration motor (RSRM)........... Drives the rear side registration cursor. Trailing edge registration home position sensor (TERHPS) ........................................ Detects the trailing edge registration cursor in the home position. Side registration front home position sensor (SRFHPS) ........................................ Detects the front side registration cursor in the home position. Side registration rear home position sensor (SRRHPS)........................................ Detects the rear side registration cursor in the home position.
2-2-2
3J3 (3) Stapler section
3 5
4 Machine front Machine inside Machine rear
Figure 2-2-3 Stapler section 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Stapler empty sensor (STES) ...................... Detects the presence of staples. Staple cartridge sensor (STCS) ................... Detects the presence of the staple cartridge. Stapler home position sensor (STHPS) ....... Detects the stapler in the home position. Stapler self-priming sensor (STSPS) ........... Detects the pre-stapling state of the stapler. Stapler motor (STM)..................................... Drives the stapler.
2-2-3
3J3
2-2-4
3J3
2-3-1
Finisher control PWB

FINPWB FSSOL ACT/RET Paper conveying unit FSSOL
5V DF SEL Machine DF RDY
5V
Driver circuit Q1, Q2
PUSOL PCSW
PUSOL PCSW PCM
Buffer U2
Serial communication SCLK SDI SDO
Stepping motor driver circuit U4 CPU U1
TOCSW
TOCSW Sensors STM Stapler section
STES, STCS, STHPS, STSPS Motor driver circuit U6
EEPROM U3
SCL SDA
Stepping motor driver circuit U7 Stepping motor driver circuit U9 Stepping motor driver circuit U10 ITS,SRFHPS,SRRHPS,TERHPS
FSRM
5V
TERM
Reset IC RESET U5
RSRM
Switches sensors
Figure 2-3-1 Finisher control PWB diagram
2-3-1
3J3
9 YC5
15
YC4 1
YC3 YC7 2 1 1 YC6 7 1 YC1 13 YC2 1 2 23 24
Figure 2-3-2 Finisher control PWB silk-screen diagram
2-3-2
3J3 Connector YC1 Connected to the machine Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 YC2 Connected to PUSOL, FSSOL, PCM, stapler section and PCSW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 24V 24V PG PG 5V SG DF SEL DF RDY SDI SDO SCLK JCT SOL(ACT) JCT SOL(RET) JCT SOL(RET) PU SOL JCT SOL(ACT) CMOT A JCT SOL 24V CMOT B PU SOL 24V CMOT _A CMOT A 24V CMOT _B CMOT B 24V ST MOT R ST CART ST MOT R ST LOW ST MOT F ST SP ST MOT F ST HP ST GND FEED FEED GND FEED 5V ST 5V Signal I/O I I I I O I O I I I O O O O O O O O O O O O I O I O O O I I O O Voltage 24 V DC 24 V DC 5 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC 24 V DC supply 24 V DC supply Ground Ground 5 V DC supply Ground Finisher select signal Finisher ready signal Description
0/5 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal 0/5 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal 0/5 V DC (pulse) Clock signal for serial communication 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC (pulse) 24 V DC 0/24 V DC (pulse) 24 V DC 0/24 V DC (pulse) 24 V DC 0/24 V DC (pulse) 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC FSSOL (active): On/Off FSSOL (return): On/Off FSSOL drive signal (return) PUSOL: On/Off FSSOL drive signal (active) PCM drive pulse (A) 24 V DC supply for FSSOL PCM drive pulse (B) 24 V DC supply for PUSOL PCM drive pulse (_A) 24 V DC supply for PCM A PCM drive pulse (_B) 24 V DC supply for PCM B STM reverse rotation drive signal STCS detection signal STM reverse rotation drive signal STES detection signal STM forward rotation drive signal STSPS detection signal STM forward rotation drive signal STHS detection signal Ground PCSW detection signal Ground 5 V DC supply for PCSW 5 V DC supply for ST
2-3-3
3J3 Connector YC3 Connected to ITS and SRFHPS Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 YC4 Connected to FSRM, RSRM and TERM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 YC5 Connected to TOCSW, SRRHPS and TERHPS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 5V TRAY SG 5V FJ HP SG FJ A COM FJ _B FJ B FJ _A RJ A COM RJ _B RJ B RJ _A RE A COM RE _B RE B RE _A 5V TOPN SG 5V RJ HP SG 5V RE HP SG Signal I/O O I O I O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O I O I O I Voltage 5 V DC 0/5 V DC 5 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/24 V DC (pulse) 24 V DC 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 24 V DC 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 24 V DC 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/5 V DC 5 V DC 0/5 V DC 5 V DC 0/5 V DC Description 5 V DC supply for ITS ITS detection signal Ground 5 V DC supply for SRFHPS SRFHPS detection signal Ground FSRM drive pulse (A) 24 V DC supply for FSRM FSRM drive pulse (_B) FSRM drive pulse (B) FSRM drive pulse (_A) RSRM drive pulse (A) 24 V DC supply for RSRM RSRM drive pulse (_B) RSRM drive pulse (B) RSRM drive pulse (_A) TERM drive pulse (A) 24 V DC supply for TERM 24 V DC supply for TERM TERM drive pulse (B) TERM drive pulse (_A) Not used TOCSW detection signal Ground 5 V DC supply for SRRHPS SRRHPS detection signal Ground 5 V DC supply for TERHPS TERHPS detection signal Ground
2-3-4
3J3
2-4 Appendixes
Maintenance parts list

Maintenance part name Name used in service manual Intermediate tray Upper curl eliminator roller Lower curl eliminator roller Eject roller Eject pulleys Feedshift roller Feedshift pulleys Press roller Switches and sensors Name used in parts list TRAY MIDDLE UPPER ROLLER,DECURLER ROLLER SUS,DECURLER ROLLER,EJECT PULLEY,LOOP FEED ROLLER,FEED SHIFT PULLEY,BRANCH ROLLER,PRESSURE SENSORS Part No. 303J336060 303B508131 3B508430 303B508181 63210170 3BN08090 3BN08100 303BN08571 3BN08571 3B508181 Alternative part No. 3J336060 3B508131 Fig. No. 3 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 Ref. No. 1 52 49 21 46 33 34 12 -

Section Paper conveying and intermediate tray section Maintenance part/location Intermediate tray Method Clean and grease Check and grease Upper curl eliminator roller Clean Check and clean Lower curl eliminator roller Clean Check and clean Eject roller Clean Check and clean Clean Check and clean Clean Check and clean Clean Check and clean Clean Check and clean Clean Check and clean Maintenance cycle Every service Points and cautions Clean the rail section and apply molycote grease EM50L 50G (P/N: M014000080). Page
User call Every service User call Every service User call Every service User call Every service User call Every service User call Every service User call Every service User call Every service User call Clean with alcohol.
Clean with alcohol.
Clean with alcohol.
Eject pulleys
Clean with alcohol.
Feedshift roller
Clean with alcohol.
Feedshift pulleys
Clean with alcohol.
Press roller
Clean with alcohol.
Switches and sensors
Airbrush.
Section Stapler section
Maintenance part/location Magnet
Method Clean
Points and cautions Remove the staples attracted to the magnet inside the stapler cover.
Page P.1-5-3
2-4-1
3J3
2-4-2
YC2
C1-4 C1-11
1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
Wiring diagram
TOCSW PUSOL FSSOL
YC16
YC2-7 YC2-2
YC1
24V 24V PG PG 5V SG DF SEL DF RDY SDI SDO SCLK

6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Machine EPWB YC17
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 24V 2 24V 3 PG 4 PG 5 5V 6 SG 7 DF SEL 8 DF RDY 9 SDI 10 SDO 11 SCLK 12 JCT SOL (ACT) 13 JCT SOL (RET)
PCM
Stapler
24VR JCT SOL1 JCT SOL2 5V LED 5V EPDSW SG DETECTION SG SG 5V JBESW
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
FINPWB
JCT SOL(RET) PU SOL JCT SOL(ACT) CMOT A JCT SOL 24V CMOT B PU SOL 24V CMOT _A CMOT A 24V CMOT _B CMOT B 24V ST MOT R ST CART ST MOT R ST LOW ST MOT F ST SP ST MOT F ST HP ST GND FEED FEED GND FEED 5V ST 5V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
C1-10 C1-3 C1-13 C1-12 C1-8 C1-9 C1-14 C1-18 C1-15 C1-19 C1-16 C1-23 C1-17 C1-20 C1-21 C1-25 C1-26 C1-24 C1-22
YC2-10 YC2-11 YC2-6 YC2-4 YC2-9 YC2-8 YC2-12 YC2-14 YC2-16 YC2-18 YC2-13 YC2-15 YC2-19 YC2-20 YC2-24 YC2-17 YC2-23 YC2-21 YC2-22
YC5
1 2 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
SRRHPS TERHPS
YC4
5V TOPN SG 5V RJ HP SG 5V RE HP SG
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3
1 2 3
PCSW
FSRM
YC3
RSRM
3 2 1
3 2 1
ITS
3 2 1 3 2 1
5V TRAY SG 5V FJ HP SG
1 2 3 4 5 6
6 5 4 3 2 1
SRFHPS
TERM
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 FJ A 2 COM 3 FJ _B 4 FJ B 5 FJ _A 6 RJ A 7 COM 8 RJ _B 9 RJ B 10 RJ _A 11 RE A 12 COM 13 RE _B 14 RE B 15 RE _A
DF-730
5H1-1
CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications
1-2 Installation
1-2-1 Installation environment ..........................................................................................................................1-2-1 1-2-2 Unpacking and installation ......................................................................................................................1-2-2 (1) Installation procedure ........................................................................................................................1-2-2 (2) Remove the tapes and pad ...............................................................................................................1-2-3

1-4 Troubleshooting

1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly............................................................................................1-5-1 (1) Precautions .......................................................................................................................................1-5-1 (2) Cleaning the paper conveying roller and reverse exit roller ..............................................................1-5-2

2-1-1 Mechanical construction .........................................................................................................................2-1-1 (1) Reverse section.................................................................................................................................2-1-1 (2) Processing section ...........................................................................................................................2-1-6 (3) Exit tray section ...............................................................................................................................2-1-10

2-2-1 Electrical parts layout..............................................................................................................................2-2-1 (1) PWBs ................................................................................................................................................2-2-1 (2) Switches and sensors .......................................................................................................................2-2-2 (3) Motors ...............................................................................................................................................2-2-3 (4) Solenoids...........................................................................................................................................2-2-4 (5) Stapler section...................................................................................................................................2-2-5

2-3-1 Finisher main PWB .................................................................................................................................2-3-1
2-4 Appendixes
Timing chart No.1....................................................................................................................................2-4-1 Timing chart No.2....................................................................................................................................2-4-2 Timing chart No.3....................................................................................................................................2-4-3 List of maintenance parts........................................................................................................................2-4-4 Periodic maintenance procedures ..........................................................................................................2-4-5 Wiring diagram........................................................................................................................................2-4-7
5H1
5H1
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1
Specifications
Type ................................................ Floor model Number of trays .............................. One tray Tray capacity................................... When not stapling: A3, B4 (257 mm x 364 mm), 11" x 17" or 8 1/2" x 14": 500 sheets A4R, A4, 8 1/2" x 11" or 11" x 8 1/2": 1000 sheets* *A4R and 8 1/2" x 11" during sorting or offset ejection: 500 sheets (For B5R, job offset is not available.) When stapling 2 or 9 sheets: A3, B4 (257 mm x 364 mm), 11" x 17" or 8 1/2" x 14": 70 to 28 sets A4R, A4, B5, 8 1/2" x 11" or 11" x 8 1/2": 70 to 50 sets When stapling 10 or 20 sheets: A3, B4 (257 mm x 364 mm), 11" x 17" or 8 1/2" x 14": 25 to 12 sets A4R, A4, B5, 8 1/2" x 11" or 11" x 8 1/2": 45 to 16 sets When stapling 21 or 30 sheets: A4R, A4, B5, 8 1/2" x 11" or 11" x 8 1/2": 45 to 16 sets Stapling limit.................................... A3, B4 (257 mm x 364 mm), Folio, 11" x 17" or 8 1/2" x 14": 20 sheets A4R, A4, 8 1/2" x 11" or 11" x 8 1/2": 30 sheets Power source.................................. Electrically connected to the machine Dimensions ..................................... 558 (W) x 526 (D) x 916 (H) mm 22" (W) x 20 11/16" (D) x 36 1/16" (H) Weight............................................. Approx. 25 kg/55 lbs (with attachments)
1-1-1
5H1
1-1-2
Parts names
Figure 1-1-1 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Exit tray Exit tray extension Finisher release button Reverse cover Upper cover Stapler cover Staple holder
1-1-2
5H1
1-1-3
Figure 1-1-2 Machine cross section 1. 2. 3. Reverse section Processing section Exit tray section
1-1-3
5H1
1-1-4
5H1
1-2 Installation
1-2-1
1.
1-2-1
5H1
1-2-2
Unpacking and installation
(1) Installation procedure
Figure 1-2-1 Unpacking 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Document finisher Latch catch Rail retainer Guide rail Joints Outer case Top plate Pad Pad Pad Pad Pad 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. Pad Pad Pad Hinge joints Skid Pad Supports Installation guide Clamp M4 x 6 binding screws M4 x 10 binding screws
Caution: Place the machine on a level surface. 1-2-2
5H1 (2) Remove the tapes and pad When installing the machine, be sure to remove the following tapes and pad. 1. Remove the two tapes holding the reverse cover. 2. Remove the two tapes holding the reverse guide. 3. Remove the tape holding the upper cover. 4. Open the upper cover and remove the pad. 5. Remove the tape holding the exit tray extension. 6. Open the stapler cover and remove the tape holding the stapler. 7. Remove the tape holding the signal cable and the air mat.
Tape
Tape Tape
Tape
Tape
Tape
Tape
Air mat Tape
Figure 1-2-2
1-2-3
5H1
1-2-4
5H1-1
1-3-1
Start
Yes
No
Yes
End
1-3-1
5H1 (2) Contents of maintenance mode items Maintenance item No. U905 Description Checking counts by optional devices Description Displays the counts of optional DP or finisher. Purpose To check the use of optional DP and finisher. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the device, the count of which is to be checked. The count of the selected device is displayed. DP Display ADP RADP FINISHER (document finisher) Display CP CNT STAPLE PUNCH STACK SADDLE Description Number of copies that has passed Frequency the stapler has been activated Description Number of single-sided originals that has passed through the DP Number of double-sided originals that has passed through the DP
Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-2
5H1-1
1-3-2
Start
Press the stop key.
Yes
No
Yes
End
1-3-3
5H1-1 (2) Contents of maintenance mode items Maintenance item No. U905 Description Checking/clearing counts by optional devices Description Displays or clears the counts of DP or finisher. Purpose To check the use of DP and finisher. Also to clear the counts after replacing consumable parts. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the device, the count of which is to be checked. The count of the selected device is displayed. Display DP FINISHER DP Display ADP RADP Finisher Display CP CNT STAPLE PUNCH STACK SADDLE Description No. of copies that has passed Frequency the stapler has been activated Description No. of single-sided originals that has passed through the DP No. of double-sided originals that has passed through the DP Description Counts of optional DP Counts of optional finisher
Clearing 1. Select the item to be cleared. To clear the counts for all, press the clear key. 2. Press the start key. The count is cleared. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-4
5H1
1-4 Troubleshooting
1-4-1
(1) Paper misfeed indication When a paper misfeed occurs, the machine immediately stops copying and displays the jam location on the operation panel. To remove the jammed paper, detach the finisher from the machine. To reset the paper misfeed detection, turn the joint switch (JSW) off and on. (2) Paper misfeed detection conditions
PCS PES1
REVS
PES2
EXS
Figure 1-4-1
1-4-1
5H1 Section Finisher Jam code 81 Paper entry sensor nonarrival jam 82 Jam in stapler 83 Exit sensor stay jam Conditions Specified time
The paper entry sensor (PES) is not turned on even if a speci- 2627ms fied time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was received. The staple home position sensor (STSPS) is not turned on within the specified time when driving the staple motor (STM). In the straight mode, the exit sensor (EXS) is not turned off within specified time of its turning on. In the offset or staple mode, the exit sensor (EXS) is not turned off within specified time of its turning on. 1s 1680ms 5375ms -
91 Finisher cover open
The front cover, top cover or tray C is opened when starting the finisher operation. The centerfold unit top cover is opened when starting the centerfold operation. The mail box cover is opened when starting the operation. In the straight mode, the exit sensor (EXS) is not turned on even if a specified time has elapsed after the paper entry sensor (PES) was turned on. The reverse sensor (REVS) does not turn on within specified time of paper entry sensor (PES) turning on. The reverse sensor (REVS) is not turned on within specified time. The reverse sensor (REVS) does not turn off within specified time of paper entry sensor (PES) turning off. The reverse sensor (REVS) is not turned off within specified time its turning on.
92 Exit sensor non-arrival jam 93 Reverse sensor jam
1770ms
1071ms 435ms 622ms Depends on paper size Depends on paper size 735ms 1004ms
94 Paper entry sensor stay/ remaining jam 95 Paper conveying sensor jam
The paper entry sensor (PES) is not turned off within specified time its turning on. The paper conveying sensor (PCS) does not turn on within specified time of reverse sensor (REVS) turning on. The paper conveying sensor (PCS) does not turn off within specified time of reverse sensor (REVS) turning off.
1-4-2
5H1 (3) Paper misfeeds Problem (1) A paper jam in document finisher is indicated during copying (paper jam during paper insertion to the finisher). Jam code 81 (2) A paper jam in document finisher is indicated during copying (finisher stapler jam). Jam code 82 (3) A paper jam in document finisher is indicated during copying (eject sensor stay jam). Jam code 83 Causes/check procedures Extremely curled paper. Defective paper entry sensor. Change the paper. With 5 V DC present at CN14-1 and CN14-3 on the finisher main PWB, check if CN14-2and CN14-4 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the paper entry sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the paper entry sensor.) Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. Corrective measures
Defective finisher main PWB.
Defective staple home posi- Run maintenance item U241 and turn the taple home position tion sensor. sensor on and off manually. Replace the sensor if indication of the corresponding sensor on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Defective eject sensor.
With 5 V DC present at CN5-4 on the finisher main PWB, check if CN5-6 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the eject sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the eject sensor. Check and remedy. Check and remedy.
Check if the paper conveying motor malfunctions. Check if the exit roller and exit pulley contact each other. Check if the exit guide is deformed. Defective finisher main PWB.
Check and remedy. Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. With 5 V DC present at CN5-4 on the finisher main PWB, check if CN5-6 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the exit sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the exit sensor. Check. Check and remedy.
(4) A paper jam in document finisher is indicated during copying (eject sensor nonarrival jam). Jam code 92
Defective eject sensor.
Check if the paper conveying motor malfunctions. Check if the exit roller and exit pulley contact each other. Check if the exit guide is deformed. Defective finisher main PWB.
Check and remedy. Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation.
1-4-3
5H1 Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures With 5 V DC present at CN14-5 on the finisher main PWB, check if CN14-7 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the reverse sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the reverse sensor. Check. Check and remedy.
(5) Defective reverse sensor. A paper jam in document finisher is indicated during copying (reverse sensor jam). Check if the reverse motor Jam code 93 malfunctions. Check if the reverse roller and reverse pulley contact each other. Check if the reverse guide is deformed. Defective finisher main PWB. (6) A paper jam in document finisher is indicated during copying (paper entry sensor stay jam). Jam code 94 Extremely curled paper. Defective paper entry sensor.
Check and remedy. Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. Change the paper. With 5 V DC present at CN14-1and CN14-3 on the finisher main PWB, check if CN14-2 and CN14-4 on the main PCB remains low or high when the paper entry sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the paper entry sensor. Check and remedy. Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. With 5 V DC present at CN4-4 on the finisher main PWB, check if CN4-6 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the paper conveying sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the paper conveying sensor. Check.
Check if the paper entry guide is deformed. Defective finisher main PWB.
(7) A paper jam in document finisher is indicated during copying (paper conveying sensor jam). Jam code 95
Defective paper conveying sensor.
Check if the paper conveying motor malfunctions.
Check if the paper convey- Check and remedy. ing roller and paper conveying pulley contact each other. Check if the paper conveying guide is deformed. Defective finisher main PWB. Check and remedy. Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation.
1-4-4
5H1
1-4-2
Self-diagnosis
(1) Self-diagnostic function This unit is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, copying is disabled and the problem displayed as a code consisting of C followed by a number, indicating the nature of the problem. A message is also displayed requesting the user to call for service. After removing the problem, the self-diagnostic function can be reset by turning cover switch off and back on. (2) Self diagnostic codes Remarks Code C0440 Contents Document finisher communication problem A communication error from document finisher is detected 10 times in succession. Causes Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check procedures/corrective measures Check the connection of connector YC33 on the engine PWB and the connector on the finisher main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Replace the finisher main PWB or engine PWB and check for correct operation. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective PWB. C8030 Tray upper limit detection problem When the tray elevation motor raises a tray, the ON status of the tray upper limit sensor is detected. The tray upper limit sensor/push paper sensor/surface view sensor connector makes poor contact.
Defective tray Replace the sensor. upper limit sensor/ push paper sensor/ surface view sensor. Defective finisher main PWB. C8140 Tray elevation motor problem When the tray elevation motor is driving, the ON status of the tray lower limit sensor or surface view sensor cannot be detected even if a specified time has elapsed. The tray elevation motor connector makes poor contact. The tray elevation motor malfunctions. The tray lower limit sensor/push paper sensor/surface view sensor connector makes poor contact. Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Replace the tray elevation motor.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective tray Replace the sensor. lower limit sensor/ push paper sensor/ surface view sensor. Defective finisher main PWB. Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation.
1-4-5
5H1 Remarks Code C8170 Contents Adjustment motor problem When the adjustment motor is driving, the ON status of the adjustment home position sensor cannot be detected even if a specified time has elapsed. When adjustment operation starts, the ON status of the adjustment home position sensor is not detected. Causes The adjustment motor connector makes poor contact. Defective adjustment motor. The adjustment home position sensor connector makes poor contact. Defective adjustment home position sensor. Defective finisher main PWB. C8210 Stapler problem When the stapler motor is driving, the ON status of the stapler home position sensor cannot be detected even if a specified time has elapsed. The stapler connector makes poor contact. The stapler is blocked with a staple. The stapler is broken. Defective finisher main PWB. C8440 Sensor adjusting problem The sensor cannot be adjusted within the specified range. The paper entry sensor connector makes poor contact. Defective paper entry sensor. The optical path of the paper entry sensor is blocked by foreign matter. Defective finisher main PWB. C8460 EEPROM problem Reading from or writing to EEPROM cannot be performed. Defective EEPROM or finisher main PWB. Check procedures/corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Replace adjustment motor. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Replace the adjustment home position sensor. Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Remove the stapler cartridge, and check the cartridge and the stapling section of the stapler. Replace the stapler and check for correct operation. Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Replace the paper entry sensor and check for correct operation. Remove the foreign matter.
Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation.
1-4-6
5H1
1-4-3
Electric problems
Problem Causes Poor contact in the connector terminals. Defective reverse motor. Check procedures/corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check if the reverse motor rotates when 24 V DC is present at CN15-1 and CN15-2, and drive pulses are at CN15-3, CN15-4, CN15-5 and CN15-6 on the finisher main PWB. If not, replace the reverse motor. Check if CN15-3, CN15-4, CN15-5 and CN15-6 on the finisher main PWB goes low. If not, replace the finisher main PWB. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check if the paper conveying motor rotates when 24 V DC is present at CN7-5 and CN7-6, and drive pulses are at CN7-1, CN7-2, CN7-3 and CN7-4 on the finisher main PWB. If not, replace the paper conveying motor. Check if CN7-1, CN7-2, CN7-3 and CN7-4 on the finisher main PWB go low. If not, replace the finisher main PWB. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
(1) The reverse motor does not operate.
Defective finisher main PWB. (2) The paper conveying motor does not operate. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Defective paper conveying motor.
Defective finisher main PWB. (3) The adjustment motor does not operate. Poor contact in the connector terminals.
Defective adjustment motor. Check if the adjustment motor rotates when drive pulses are at CN8-1, CN8-2, CN8-3 and CN8-4 on the finisher main PWB. If not, replace the adjustment motor. Defective finisher main PWB. Check if CN8-1, CN8-2, CN8-3 and CN8-4 on the finisher main PWB go low. If not, replace the finisher main PWB. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check if the tray elevation motor rotates when 24 V DC is present at CN11-7 and CN11-8 on the finisher main PWB. If not, replace the tray elevation motor. Check if 24 V DC is present at CN11-7 and CN11-8 on the finisher main PWB. If not, replace the finisher main PWB. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the separate solenoid. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check if CN12-3 on the finisher main PWB goes low. If not, replace the finisher main PWB. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the flapper solenoid. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check if CN12-1 on the finisher main PWB goes low. If not, replace the finisher main PWB. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the large gear solenoid. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check if CN17-2 on the finisher main PWB goes low. If not, replace the finisher main PWB.
(4) The tray elevation motor does not operate.
Poor contact in the connector terminals. Defective tray elevation motor. Defective finisher main PWB.
(5) The separate solenoid does not operate.
Defective separate solenoid coil. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Defective finisher main PWB.
(6) The flapper solenoid does not operate.
Defective flapper solenoid coil. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Defective finisher main PWB.
(7) The large gear solenoid does not operate.
Defective large gear solenoid coil. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Defective finisher main PWB.
1-4-7
5H1 Problem (8) The paddle solenoid does not operate. Causes Defective paddle solenoid coil. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Defective finisher main PWB. (9) The surface view solenoid does not operate. Defective surface view solenoid coil. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Defective finisher main PWB. (10) Paper jams when the main power switch is turned on. A piece of paper torn from an paper is caught around the paper entry sensor, reverse sensor, paper conveying sensor or exit sensor. Defective paper entry sensor. Check procedures/corrective measures Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the paddle solenoid. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check if CN9-2 on the finisher main PWB goes low. If not, replace the finisher main PWB. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the surface view solenoid. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check if CN6-2 and CN6-3 on the finisher main PWB goes low. If not, replace the finisher main PWB. Check visually and remove it, if any.
With 5 V DC present at CN14-1and CN14-3 on the finisher main PWB, check if CN14-2 and CN14-4 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the paper entry sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the paper entry sensor. With 5 V DC present at CN14-5 on the finisher main PWB, check if CN14-7 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the reverse sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the reverse sensor. With 5 V DC present at CN4-4 on the finisher main PWB, check if CN4-6 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the paper conveying sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the paper conveying sensor. With 5 V DC present at CN5-4 on the finisher main PWB, check if CN5-6 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the exit sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the exit sensor. Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. With 5 V DC present at CN10-6 on the finisher main PWB, check if CN10-6 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the stapler empty sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the stapler empty sensor. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. With 5 V DC present at CN10-5 on the finisher main PWB, check if CN10-5 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the stapler cartridge sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the stapler cartridge sensor. Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation.
Defective reverse sensor.
Defective paper conveying sensor.
Defective exit sensor.
Defective finisher main PWB. (11) [Out of staples. Add staples.] is displayed when the main power switch is turned on. Defective stapler empty sensor.
Poor contact in the connector terminals. Defective stapler cartridge sensor.
Defective finisher main PWB.
1-4-8
5H1
1-4-4
Mechanical problems
Problem Causes/check procedures Paper outside specifications is used. Check if the surfaces of the paper conveying roller, paper conveying pulleys, reverse roller and reverse pulleys are soiled with paper powder. Check if the paper conveying roller, paper conveying pulleys, reverse roller and reverse pulleys are deformed. Corrective measures Use only paper conforming to the specifications. Clean with isopropyl alcohol, if they are soiled.
(1) No paper conveying.
Replace any deformed or worn pulleys or roller. Use only paper conforming to the specifications.
(2) No paper ejection to the exit tray.
Paper outside specifications is used.
Check if the surfaces of the exit roller and pul- Clean with isopropyl alcohol, if they are leys are soiled with paper powder. soiled. Check if the exit roller and pulleys are deformed. Replace any deformed or worn pulleys or roller. Use only paper conforming to the specifications. Change the paper. Remedy if there are any problems.
(3) Paper jams.
Paper outside specifications is used. Check if the paper is extremely curled. Check if the paper conveying roller and pulleys, or reverse roller and pulleys make proper contact. Check if the exit roller and pulleys make proper contact.
Remedy if there are any problems. Apply grease to the bushings and gears. Readjust the tension of the motor bracket.
(4) Check if rollers, pulleys and gears all operate Abnormal noise is heard. smoothly. Check to see if the vibration noise of each motor is abnormally high.
1-4-9
5H1
1-4-10
5H1
1-5-1
(1) Precautions Before starting disassembly, press the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the Power lamp is off before turning off the main power switch. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet. Turning off the main power switch before pressing the Power key to off may cause damage to the equipped hard disk. When handling PWBs (printed wiring boards), do not touch parts with bare hands. The PWBs are susceptible to static charge. Do not touch any PWB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge. When replacing battery on a PWB, dispose properly according to laws and regulations. Output cables from the main machine are non-LPS. Please use the item below Interconnenting cables. P/N: 305H180180 Circuit type: Non-LPS Circuit specs: 24V DC
1-5-1
5H1 (2) Cleaning the paper conveying roller and reverse exit roller Follow the procedure below to clean the paper conveying roller and reverse exit roller. Procedure 1. Remove the two screws holding the front cover and then the cover.
Front cover
Figure 1-5-1
2. Remove the two screws holding the rear cover and then the cover.
Rear cover
Figure 1-5-2
1-5-2
5H1 3. Open the upper cover and release the front and rear stopper. 4. Release the fitting portions of the upper cover and then remove the cover.
Upper cover
Fitting portion
Fitting portion
Stopper
Stopper
Figure 1-5-3
5. Remove the two screws and connector and then remove the paper conveying guide unit. 6. Clean the paper conveying roller and reverse exit roller.
Connector
Paper conveying guide unit
Figure 1-5-4
1-5-3
5H1
1-5-4
5H1
2-1-1
(1) Reverse section The reverse section consists of the components shown in Fig. 2-1-1 and conveys paper that is fed from the machine into the finisher to the reverse unit or the processing section. Feedshift to the reverse unit or the processing section is erformed with the flapper that is activated by the flapper solenoid (FSOL). In the reverse mode, paper that is fed into the finisher is temporarily fed to the reverse unit, is reversed, and then is conveyed to the processing section with the rotation of the reverse roller and reverse exit roller.
Figure 2-1-1 Reverse section (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Paper entry sensor 1 (PES1) Paper entry sensor 2 (PES2) Flapper Flapper Reverse roller (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) Reverse pulley Separate solenoid (SSOL) Reverse sensor (REVS) Reverse exit roller Paper conveying pulley
2-1-1
5H1
FMPWB
CN13. 1 CN13. 2 CN13. 3 CN13. 4 CN13. 5 CN13. 6 DC+24V JSW J_PTH RC_PTH DC+24V RCSW RD YW BE BE RD YW RD YW BE CNJJ.NO CNJJ.CM CNJJ.NC
Reverse unit JSW
RD YW BE
CNJJ.NO CNJJ.CM CNJJ.NC
RCSW
CN15. 6 CN15. 5 CN15. 4 CN15. 3 CN15. 2 CN15. 1
RM A RM_A RM B RM_B +24V +24V
BE BE BE BE BE BE
BE BE BE BE BE BE
CN00. 1 CN00. 2 CN00. 3 CN00. 4 CN00. 5 CN00. 6
BK CNPP. 6 WE CNPP. 5 RD CNPP. 4 YW CNPP. 3 BE RM B CNPP. 2 OE RM_B CNPP. 1 +24V +24V RM A RM_A
RM
CN14. 1 CN14. 2 CN14. 3 CN14. 4 CN14. 5 CN14. 6 CN14. 7 CN14. 8
+5V PES1 +5V PES2 +5V SGND REVS N.C.
BK BK BE BE BE BE BE
BK BK
PES1 CNGG. 1 +5V CNGG. 2
PES1
BE BE CNKK. 1 PES2 CNLL. 2 BE BE CNKK. 2 PES1 CNLL. 1
BE BE
PES2 CNHH. 1 +5V CNHH. 2
PES2
BE BE BE
REVS CNFF. 1 SGND CNFF. 2 +5 V CNFF. 3
REVS
CN12. 4 CN12. 3 CN12. 2 CN12. 1
+24V SSOL +24V FSOL
BK BK BE BE
BK BK
CNCC. 1 CNCC. 2
SSOL CNDD. 2 +24V CNDD. 1
SSOL
BE BE
CNAA. 1 CNAA. 2
FSOL CNBB. 2 +24V CNBB. 1
FSOL
Figure 2-1-2 Reverse section block diagram
2-1-2
5H1 Operation without reversing 1. When the operation start signal is received, the flapper solenoid (FSOL) is turned on to open the non-reverse path. 2. After the machine exit signal is received, the reverse motor (RM) is turned on at the machine exit speed. 3. When the leading edge of paper arrives at the paper entry sensor (PES), the paper conveying motor (PCM) is turned on at the machine exit speed. 4. The reverse exit roller that is rotated by the drive of the reverse motor (RM) conveys paper to the processing section.
PES1
Reverse exit roller
PES2 FSOL:ON
Flappar
Paper path
Figure 2-1-3 Operation without reversing
2-1-3
5H1 Operation with reversing 1. When the operation start signal is received, the flapper solenoid (FSOL) is turned off to open the reverse path. 2. After the machine exit signal is received, the reverse motor (RM) is turned on at the machine exit speed.
PES1
Flappar
PES2 FSOL:OFF
Paper path
Figure 2-1-4
3. When the leading edge of paper arrives at the paper entry sensor (PES), if the separate solenoid (SSOL) is in the suction state, the paper is separated. If the paper conveying motor (PCM) stops, the motor is turned on at the machine exit speed.
PES1
PES2 Reverse roller
Reverse pulley SSOL:ON
Paper path
Figure 2-1-5
2-1-4
5H1
4. Suction of the separate solenoid (SSOL) is activated just before the trailing edge of paper passes through the machine exit roller. 5. When the trailing edge of paper passed through the machine exit roller, the reverse motor (RM) is accelerated to pull the paper out.
Reverse roller
Reverse pulley SSOL:OFF
Paper path
Figure 2-1-6
6. After the paper stops at the reverse position, the reverse motor (RM) is rotated in the reverse direction to convey the paper to the processing section. 7. After the leading edge of paper arrives at the reverse sensor (REVS), the separate solenoid (SSOL) is separated to receive the next paper.
REVS
Reverse exit roller
Reverse roller
SSOL:OFF
Paper path
Figure 2-1-7
2-1-5
5H1 (2) Processing section The processing section consists of the components shown in Fig. 2-1-8 and discharges paper conveyed from the finisher reverse section to the exit tray. Also this section performs processing in the bundle discharge mode and the staple mode.
Figure 2-1-8 Processing section (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) Paper conveying sensor (PCS) Paper conveying roller Paper conveying pulley Bundle discharge unit Paddle Paper conveying belt Processing tray (8) (9) (10) (11) Exit pulley Exit roller Exit sensor (EXS) Adjustment home position sensor (ADHPS) (12) Large gear solenoid (LGSOL)
2-1-6
5H1
BDUSW
CN T.NC CN T.CM CN T.NO
BE RD
YW BE
DC+24V CN 3. 1 BDUSW CN 3. 4
FMPWB
PCS
CN E. 1 PCS CN E. 2 SGND CN E. 3 +5V
BE BE BE
BE BE BE
+5V CN 4. 4 SGND CN 4. 5 PCS CN 4. 6
ADHPS
CN F. 1 ADHPS CN F. 2 SGND CN F. 3 +5V
BE BE BE
EXS
CN G. 1 EXS CN G. 2 SGND CN G. 3 +5V
BK BK BK
BE BE BE BK BK BK
+5V SGND ADHPS +5V SGND EXS N.C.
CN 5. 1 CN 5. 2 CN 5. 3 CN 5. 4 CN 5. 5 CN 5. 6 CN 5. 7
PCM
CN L. 1 CN L. 2 CN L. 3 CN L. 4 CN L. 5 CN L. 6 CN L. 7 CN L. 8 CN L. 9 CN L.1 CN L.11
PCM A N.C. +24V N.C. PCM_A N.C PCM B N.C. +24V N.C. PCM_B
BK RD BN YW BE OE BK BN YW OE RD BE
PCM A PCM_A PCM B PCM_B +24V +24V
CN 7. 1 CN 7. 2 CN 7. 3 CN 7. 4 CN 7. 5 CN 7. 6
ADM
BE OE RD YW
CN N. 4 CN N. 3 CN N. 2 CN N. 1
ADM B ADM_B ADM A ADM_A
CN M. 1 CN M. 2 CN M. 3 CN M. 4
BE BE BE BE
BE BE BE BE
CN 8. 4 CN 8. 3 CN 8. 2 CN 8. 1
PDSOL
BE BE
CN P. 2 PDSOL CN O. 1 CN P. 1 +24V CN O. 2
BE BE
BE BE
+24V CN 9. 1 PDSOL CN 9. 2 N.C. CN 9. 3 +24V CN17. 1 LGSOL CN17. 2
LGSOL
WE WE
CN R. 3 LGSOL CN Q. 1 CN R. 2 +24V CN Q. 2 CN R. 1 N.C. CN Q. 3
BK BK
BK BK
Figure 2-1-9 Processing section block diagram
2-1-7
5H1 Bundle discharge operation 1. When paper is conveyed into the processing section, the large gear solenoid (LGSOL)
Bundle discharge unit
LGSOL:ON
Paper path
Figure 2-1-10
2. Before the trailing edge of paper passes through the conveying roller, the paper conveying motor (PCM) is decelerated to discharge the paper to the processing tray. 3. The paddle solenoid (PDSOL) is turned on and the paddle rotates one turn to carry the paper into the processing tray. 4. The adjustment motor (ADM) is started to adjust the paper using the adjustment plate.
PDSOL:ON Paddle
Paper conveying roller
Processing tray
Paper path
Figure 2-1-11
2-1-8
5H1
5. When adjustment of the last sheet of the bundle is completed, the large gear solenoid (LGSOL) is turned off to lower the bundle discharge unit. 6. The conveying belt and the exit roller rotate to discharge the bundle of paper to the exit tray.
Bundle discharge unit
Paper conveying belt
Exit roller LGSOL:OFF
Paper path
Figure 2-1-12
2-1-9
5H1 (3) Exit tray section The exit tray section consists of the components shown in Fig. 2-1-13 and stocks paper discharged from the processing section using rotation of the exit roller and exit pulley. The upper limit position and the lower limit position of the exit tray are detected with the tray upper limit sensor (TULS) and the tray lower limit sensor (TLLS). Also the paper stock quantity is detected with the push paper sensor (PPS) and the surface view sensor (SVS).
Figure 2-1-13 Drum section (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Exit pulley Exit roller Push paper lever Push paper sensor (PPS) Surface view sensor (SVS) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) Rack Rack gear Tray elevation motor (TEM) Tray upper limit sensor (TULS) Tray lower limit sensor (TLLS)
2-1-10
5H1
SVSOL
YW BE RD
CN I. 4 CN I. 3 CN I. 2 CN I. 1
N.C. SVSOL2 SVSOL1 +24V
CN H. 1 CN H. 2 CN H. 3 CN H. 4
BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BE BE BE +24V SVSOL1 SVSOL2 +5V SGND SVS +5V SGND PPS CN 6. 1 CN 6. 2 CN 6. 3 CN 6. 4 CN 6. 5 CN 6. 6 CN 6. 7 CN 6. 8 CN 6. 9
FMPWB
SVS
CN J. 1 SVS CN J. 2 SGND CN J. 3 +5V
BK BK BK
PPS
CN K. 1 PPS CN K. 2 SGND CN K. 3 +5V
BE BE BE
Tray unit TULS

CN X. 1 TULS CN X. 2 SGND CN X. 3 +5 V BE BE BE BE BE BK BK BK BE BE BE TEM+ TEMTLLS SGND +5V TULS SGND +5V CN11. 1 CN11. 2 CN11. 3 CN11. 4 CN11. 5 CN11. 6 CN11. 7 CN11. 8
TLLS
CN Y. 1 TLLS CN Y. 2 SGND CN Y. 3 +5 V
BK BK BK
TEM
CN Z. 2 TEM+ CN Z. 1 TEM-
BE BE
Figure 2-1-14 Exit tray section block diagram
2-1-11
5H1 Exit tray up/down operation 1. Paper surface empty status Sensor status Push paper sensor (PPS): OFF Surface view sensor (SVS): OFF Exit tray control Tray elevation motor (TEM): Forward rotation. Exit tray: Moves up. This status occurs when paper is removed from the exit tray.
Push paper lever PPS:OFF SVS:OFF TEM: Forward rotatioin
Figure 2-1-15 Paper surface empty status 2. Paper surface off status Sensor status Push paper sensor (PPS): ON Surface view sensor (SVS): OFF Exit tray control Tray elevation motor (TEM): OFF Exit tray: Does not move. If this status is detected when the exit tray is moving up or down, the tray is stopped.
Push paper lever PPS:ON SVS:OFF TEM:OFF
Figure 2-1-16 Paper surface off status
2-1-12
5H1
3. Paper surface on status Sensor status Push paper sensor (PPS): ON Surface view sensor (SVS): ON Exit tray control Tray elevation motor (TEM): Reverse rotation. Exit tray: Moves down. This status occurs when paper is output onto the exit tray during copying and is accumulated.
Push paper lever PPS:ON SVS:ON TEM: Reverse rotation
Figure 2-1-17 Paper surface on status 4. Lever stored status Sensor status Push paper sensor (PPS): OFF Surface view sensor (SVS): ON Exit tray control Tray elevation motor (TEM): Reverse rotation. Exit tray: Moves down. This status occurs when paper is accumulated so much, for example at the start of copying, that the push paper lever cannot be released.
Push paper lever PPS:OFF SVS:ON TEM: Reverse rotation
Figure 2-1-18 Lever stored status
2-1-13
5H1
2-1-14
5H1
2-2-1
(1) PWBs
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-1 PWBs 1. Finisher main PWB (FMPWB) ..................... Controls electrical components.
2-2-1
5H1 (2) Switches and sensors

3
10 7 15 9 11 8 12 6 5 2 4 1
13 14
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-2 Switches and sensors 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Joint switch (JSW) ....................................... Detects the finisher attached to the machine. Reverse cover switch (RCSW) .................... Detects opening/closing of the reverse cover. Upper cover sensor (UCS)........................... Detects opening/closing of the upper cover. Paper entry sensor 1 (PES1) ....................... Detects paper entering the finisher (emitter). Paper entry sensor 2 (PES2) ....................... Detects paper entering the finisher (receiver). Reverse sensor (REVS)............................... Detects a paper misfeed in the reverse section. Paper conveying sensor (PCS).................... Detects a paper misfeed in the processing section. Adjustment home position sensor (ADHPS) ...................................................... Detects the adjustment plate in the home position. Exit sensor (EXS)......................................... Detects a paper misfeed in the exit section. Bundle discharge unit switch (BDUSW)....... Power supply to the stapler section caused by descent of the bundle discharge unit. Push paper sensor (PPS) ............................ Detects the position of the push paper lever. Surface view sensor (SVS) .......................... Detects the position of the push paper lever. Tray upper limit sensor (TULS) .................... Detects the exit tray reaching the upper limit. Tray lower limit sensor (TLLS) ..................... Detects the exit tray reaching the lower limit. Stapler cover switch (STCSW)..................... Detects opening/closing of the stapler cover.
2-2-2
5H1 (3) Motors
3 2
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-3 Motors 1. 2. 3. 4. Reverse motor (RM) .................................... Drives the reverse section. Paper conveying motor (PCM)..................... Drives the processing section. Adjustment motor (ADM) ............................. Drives the adjustment plate. Tray elevation motor (TEM) ......................... Raises and lowers the exit tray.
2-2-3
5H1 (4) Solenoids
5 2 3
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-4 Solenoids 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Separate solenoid (SSOL) ........................... Separates the reverse roller. Flapper solenoid (FSOL).............................. Operates the flapper. Large gear solenoid (LGSOL)...................... Operates the bundle discharge unit. Paddle solenoid (PDSOL)............................ Operates the paddle. Surface view solenoid (SVSOL)................... Operates the push paper lever.
2-2-4
5H1 (5) Stapler section
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-5 Stapler section 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Stapler empty sensor (STES) ...................... Detects the presence of staples. Stapler cartridge sensor (STCS) .................. Detects the presence of the stapler cartridge. Stapler home position sensor (STHPS) ....... Detects the stapler in the home position. Stapler self-priming sensor (STSPS) ........... Detects the pre-stapling state of the stapler. Stapler motor (STM)..................................... Drives the stapler.
2-2-5
5H1
2-2-6
5H1
2-3-1
Finisher main PWB

FMPWB SDO IC12.4,5
Machine
SDI
IC12.6,IC15.2
IC12.3,IC12.2 SCLK IC12.1,IC15.1 READY IC2.1,IC2.2 SELECT DET SGND STCSW BDUSW UCS PCS ADHPS EXS STCSW BDUSW UCS PCS ADHPS EXS FSOL SVSOL SVSOL Tray unit SVS PPS SVS PPS PCM A,B,_A,_B Motor driver IC6 Motor driver IC8 TULS TLLS TULS TLLS FSOL To stapler CPU IC1 IC14.1 PES2 REVS Reverse unit JSW RCSW JSW RCSW
Motor driver IC7 IC13.3
RM A,B,_A,_B
RM
PES1
PES1 PES2 REVS
SSOL
SSOL
PCM
ADM
ADM A,B,_A,_B
Motor driver IC9
TEM+,TEM-
TEM
PDSOL
PDSOL Reset Reset circuit IC3
Stapler
LGSOL
LGSOL D/A converter IC5 CLK,DI, LD,AO1-5 DO,DI, CS,SK EEPROM IC4
Figure 2-3-1 Finisher main PWB block diagram
2-3-1
5H1
4 1 CN6
1 CN9 11 CN10 1 4 CN3 1 6 CN13 1
CN12
1 CN17 1 CN1 3
12
Connector Pin No. Signal CN1 1 DC+24V Connected to the machine CN2 Connected to the machine 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 CN3 Connected to the stapler cover switch and bundle discharge unit switch 1 2 3 4 PGND DC+5.1V SGND SGND SGND SGND SGND SGND DET SDO SDI SCLK SELECT READY DC+24V SC_SW SC_SW BDU_SW
9 1 CN2 CN11 8 1 6 1 1 CN18 7 CN16 10 CN7 1 CN15 1 6 1 CN8 4 1 CN14 8 1 CN4 6 1 CN5 7
Figure 2-3-2 Finisher main PWB silk-screen diagram I/O I I O I O I I O O I I I Voltage 24 V DC 5.1 V DC 5/0 V DC 5/0 V DC 5/0 V DC 5/0 V DC 5/0 V DC 5/0 V DC 24 V DC 24/0 V DC 24/0 V DC 24/0 V DC Description 24 V DC power input Ground 5.1 V DC power input Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Finisher set signal Serial communication signal reception Serial communication signal transmission Serial clock Select signal from the machine Ready signal to the machine 24 V DC power to STCSW/BDUSW STCSW: On/Off STCSW: On/Off BDUSW: On/Off
2-3-2
5H1 Connector CN4 Connected to the upper cover sensor and paper conveying sensor CN5 Connected to the adjustment home position sensor and exit sensor CN6 Connected to the surface view solenoid, surface view sensor and push paper sensor Pin No. Signal 1 +5V 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CN7 Connected to the paper conveying motor 1 2 3 4 5 6 CN8 Connected to the adjustment motor CN9 Connected to the paddle solenoid CN10 Connected to the stapler 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 SGND TC_SEN +5V SGND FEED_SEN +5V SGND AHP_SEN +5V SGND EX_SEN N.C. +24V SV_SOL_1 SV_SOL_2 +5V SGND SV_SEN +5V SGND PP_SEN FMOT A FMOT_A FMOT B FMOT_B +24V +24V ALM A ALM_A ALM_B ALM B +24V PD_SOL N.C. STP_SPS +5V SGND STP_ULS STP_HPS STP_LSS STP_CS MTR+ MTR+ MTRMTRI/O O I O I O I O I O O O O I O I O O O O O O O O O O O O I O I I I I O O O O Voltage 5 V DC 5/0 V DC 5 V DC 5/0 V DC 5 V DC 5/0 V DC 5 V DC 5/0 V DC 24 V DC 24/0 V DC 24/0 V DC 5 V DC 5/0 V DC 5 V DC 5/0 V DC 24/0 V DC 24/0 V DC 24/0 V DC 24/0 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24/0 V DC 24/0 V DC 24/0 V DC 24/0 V DC 24 V DC 24/0 V DC 5/0 V DC 5 V DC 5/0 V DC 5/0 V DC 5/0 V DC 5/0 V DC 24/0 V DC 24/0 V DC 24/0 V DC 24/0 V DC Description 5 V DC power to UCS Ground UCS: On/Off 5 V DC power to PCS Ground PCS: On/Off 5 V DC power to ADHPS Ground ADHPS: On/Off 5 V DC power to EXS Ground EXS: On/Off Not used 24 V DC power supply to SVSOL SVSOL: On/Off (actuate) SVSOL: On/Off (release) 5 V DC power to SVS Ground SVS: On/Off 5 V DC power to PPS Ground PPS: On/Off PCM drive control signal PCM drive control signal PCM drive control signal PCM drive control signal 24 V DC power to PCM 24 V DC power to PCM ADM drive control signal ADM drive control signal ADM drive control signal ADM drive control signal 24 V DC power to PDSOL PDSOL: On/Off Not used STSPS: On/Off 5 V DC power to stapler Ground STLS: On/Off STHPS: On/Off STES: On/Off STCS: On/Off STM drive control signal STM drive control signal STM drive control signal STM drive control signal
2-3-3
5H1 Connector CN11 Connected to the tray upper limit sensor, tray lower limit sensor and tray elevation motor CN12 Connected to the separate solenoid and flapper solenoid CN13 Connected to the joint switch and reverse cover switch CN14 Connected to the paper entry sensor 1, 2 and reverse sensor Pin No. Signal 1 TEDM+ 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 TEDMT_NF_SEN SGND +5V T_UL_SEN SGND +5V F_SOL +24V S_SOL +24V I/O O O I O I O O O O O Voltage 24/0 V DC 24/0 V DC 5/0 V DC 5 V DC 5/0 V DC 5 V DC 24/0 V DC 24 V DC 24/0 V DC 24 V DC Description TEM drive control signal TEM drive control signal TLLS: On/Off Ground 5 V DC power supply to TLLS TULS: On/Off Ground 5 V DC power to TULS FSOL: On/Off 24 V DC power to FSOL SSOL: On/Off 24 V DC power to SSOL
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DC+24V J_SW J_PTH RC_PTH DC+24V RC_SW +5V IN_SEN_H +5V IN_SEN_J +5V SGND RVS_SEN N.C. +24V +24V RMOT_B RMOT B RMOT_A RMOT A +24V LG_SOL
O I O I O I O I O I O O O O O O O O
24 V DC 24/0 V DC 24 V DC 24/0 V DC 5 V DC 5/0 V DC 5 V DC 5/0 V DC 5 V DC 5/0 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24/0 V DC 24/0 V DC 24/0 V DC 24/0 V DC 24 V DC 24/0 V DC
24 V DC power to JSW JSW: On/Off Ground Ground 24 V DC power to RCSW RCSW: On/Off 5 V DC power to PES1 PES1: On/Off 5 V DC power to PES2 PES2: On/Off 5 V DC power to REVS Ground REVS: On/Off Not used 24 V DC power supply to RM 24 V DC power supply to RM RM drive control signal RM drive control signal RM drive control signal RM drive control signal 24 V DC power to LGSOL LGSOL: On/Off
CN15 Connected to the reverse motor
1 2 3 4 5 6
CN16 Connected to the large gear solenoid
1 2
2-3-4
2-4 Appendixes
Timing chart No.1 Operation without reversing, A4/11" x 8 1/2" copy paper in the straight mode
1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000 6500 (msec)
500
1000
1176.47ms
ESW (machine)
ON
OFF
Paper entry sensor
ON
OFF
Reverse sensor
ON
OFF
Paper found Reverse exit No paper roller ON Paper conveying OFF sensor Paper found Paper conveying roller No paper
Exit sonsor
ON
OFF
Flapper solenoid
ON
OFF
Sparate solenoid
ON
OFF
Reverse motor
600mm/s 400mm/s 230mm/s 178mm/s 0mm/s
400mm/s 600mm/s
450mm/s 400mm/s
Paper conveying motor
230mm/s 200mm/s 178mm/s 176mm/s 120mm/s 0mm/s
Adjusting motor
Paddle solenoid
ON
OFF
Large gear solenoid
ON
OFF
Stapler
ON
OFF
2-4-1
5H1
Timing chart No.2 Operation with reversing, A4/11" x 8 1/2" copy paper in the shift mode
1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000 6500 (msec)
5H1
2-4-2
500
1000
1176.47ms
ESW (machine)
ON
OFF
Paper entry sensor
ON
OFF
Reverse sensor
ON
OFF
Reverse exit Paper found No paper roller Paper conveying ON sensor OFF Paper found Paper conveying roller No paper
Exit sonsor
ON
OFF
Flapper solenoid
ON
OFF
Sparate solenoid
ON
OFF
Reverse motor
400mm/s 600mm/s
450mm/s 400mm/s
Adjusting motor
Paddle solenoid
ON
OFF
Large gear solenoid
ON
OFF
Stapler
ON
OFF
Timing chart No.3 Operation with reversing, A4/11" x 8 1/2" copy paper in the stapling mode
1500
2280ms
500
1000
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
5500
6000
6500
7000
7500
8000
8500
9000 (msec)
ESW (machine)
ON
OFF
Paper entry sensor
ON
OFF
Reverse sensor
ON
OFF
Paper found Reverse exit No paper roller Paper conveying ON OFF sensor Paper found Paper conveying roller No paper
Exit sonsor
ON
OFF
Flapper solenoid
ON
OFF
Sparate solenoid
ON
OFF
Reverse motor
400mm/s 600mm/s
450mm/s 400mm/s
Adjusting motor
Paddle solenoid
ON
OFF
Large gear solenoid
ON
OFF
Stapler
ON
OFF
2-4-3
5H1
5H1

Maintenance part name Name used in service manual Push paper sensor Surface view sensor Upper cover sensor Paper conveying sensor Adjusting hone position sensor Exit sensor Tray upper limit sensor Tray lower limit sensor Reverse sensor Exit roller Paper conveying belt Paper conveying roller Paddle Front static eliminator Rear static eliminator Reverse static eliminator Push paper lever cushion Name used in parts list TLP1241(C5,F) TLP1241(C5,F) TLP1241(C5,F) TLP1241(C5,F) TLP1241(C5,F) TLP1241(C5,F) TLP1241(C5,F) TLP1241(C5,F) TLP1241(C5,F) ROL-R-H-OUT CAT-C ROL-R-CAT PDL-TH BRUSH-TH-IN BRUSH-TH-OUT BRSH-RV CUSION-TM-YO Part No. 305H080320 305H080320 305H080320 305H080320 305H080320 305H080320 305H080320 305H080320 305H080320 5HL09370 5HL09360 5HL09640 5HL09430 5HL09440 5HL09470 5HL12320 5HL09660 Alternative part No. 5H080320 5H080320 5H080320 5H080320 5H080320 5H080320 5H080320 5H080320 5H080320 Fig. No. 2 2 2 2 4 4 5 5 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 6 1 Ref. No. 2 2 2 2 12 12 14 14 52 41 55 45 22 14 69 59 74
2-4-4
5H1

Section Exterior Maintenance part/location Overall exterior cover Method Cleaning Maintenance cycle Every time Points and cautions Wipe with dry cloth or cloth moistened with alcohol. Page
Section Paper conveying section
Maintenance part/location Push paper sensor Surface view sensor Upper cover sensor Paper conveying sensor Adjusting hone position sensor Exit sensor Tray upper limit sensor Tray lower limit sensor Reverse sensor Exit roller Paper conveying belt Paper conveying roller Paddle Front static eliminator Rear static eliminator Reverse static eliminator Push paper lever cushion
Method Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Check Check Check Cleaning
Maintenance cycle Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time Every time
Points and cautions Air brush Air brush Air brush Air brush Air brush Air brush Air brush Air brush Air brush Wipe with cloth moistened with alcohol. Wipe with cloth moistened with alcohol. Wipe with cloth moistened with alcohol. Wipe with cloth moistened with alcohol. If paper powder or dust adheres to tip of brush, remove it. If paper powder or dust adheres to tip of brush, remove it. If paper powder or dust adheres to tip of brush, remove it. Wipe with cloth moistened with alcohol.
Page
2-4-5
5H1
2-4-6
Wiring diagram
CN A. 1 FGND
GN
GN
BK GY BN SB RD OE PK
FMPWB
PK OE RD
I/F
CN C. 1 CN C. 2 CN C. 3 CN C. 4 CN C. 5 CN C. 6 CN C. 7 CN C. 8 CN C. 9 PGND PGND PGND PGND DC+24V DC+24V DC+24V DC+24V N.C. SB BN GY BK BE YW DC+24V DC+24V DC+24V DC+24V PGND PGND PGND PGND SGND DC+5V CN 1.10 CN 1. 9 CN 1. 8 CN 1. 7 CN 1. 6 CN 1. 5 CN 1. 4 CN 1. 3 CN 1. 2 CN 1. 1
PK: PINK BN: BROWN BE: BLUE BK: BLACK GN: GREEN GY: GRAY RD: RED WE: WHITE YW: YELLOW OE: ORANGE VT: VIOLET SB: SKY BLUE
YW BE WE/BK WE WE/RD VT GN RD YW BE BE RD YW WE/BK WE WE/RD VT GN TxD SGND RxD SGND CNCT CN 2. 5 CN 2. 4 CN 2. 3 CN 2. 2 CN 2. 1
CN B. 1 CN B. 2 CN B. 3 CN B. 4 CN B. 5 CN B. 6 CN B. 7 CN B. 8
DC+5V SGND TxD SGND RxD SGND N.C. CNCT
Reverse unit
RD YW BE CNJJ.NO CNJJ.CM CNJJ.NC
JSW
STCSW
YW GY RD BE DC+24V STCSW STCSW BDUSW CN 3. 1 CN 3. 2 CN 3. 3 CN 3. 4
CN S.NC CN S.CM CN S.NO GY YW
CN13. 1 CN13. 2 CN13. 3 CN13. 4 CN13. 5 CN13. 6 DC+24V JSW J_PTH RC_PTH DC+24V RCSW
RD YW BE
CNJJ.NO CNJJ.CM CNJJ.NC
RCSW
BDUSW
CN T.NC CN T.CM CN T.NO BE RD
UCS
CN D. 1 UCS CN D. 2 SGND CN D. 3 +5V BK BK BK BE BE BE +5V SGND UCS +5V SGND PCS CN 4. 1 CN 4. 2 CN 4. 3 CN 4. 4 CN 4. 5 CN 4. 6
BK BK BK
CN15. 6 CN15. 5 CN15. 4 CN15. 3 CN15. 2 CN15. 1
RM A RM_A RM B RM_B +24V +24V
BE BE BE BE BE BE
BE BE BE BE BE BE
CN00. 1 CN00. 2 CN00. 3 CN00. 4 CN00. 5 CN00. 6
+24V +24V RM A RM_A
BK CNPP. 6 WE CNPP. 5 RD CNPP. 4 YW CNPP. 3 BE RM B CNPP. 2 OE RM_B CNPP. 1
RM
PCS
CN E. 1 PCS CN E. 2 SGND CN E. 3 +5V
BE BE BE
PES1
BK BK PES1 CNGG. 1 +5V CNGG. 2
ADHPS
CN F. 1 ADHPS CN F. 2 SGND CN F. 3 +5V
BE BE BE
PES2
BE BE CNKK.1 PES2 CNLL.2 BE BE CNKK.2 PES1 CNLL.1 BE BE PES2 CNHH. 1 +5V CNHH. 2
BK BK BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BK BK BK +5V SGND ADHPS +5V SGND EXS N.C. CN 5. 1 CN 5. 2 CN 5. 3 CN 5. 4 CN 5. 5 CN 5. 6 CN 5. 7 CN14. 1 CN14. 2 CN14. 3 CN14. 4 CN14. 5 CN14. 6 CN14. 7 CN14. 8 +5V PES1 +5V PES2 +5V SGND REVS N.C.
EXS
CN G. 1 EXS CN G. 2 SGND CN G. 3 +5V
BK BK BK
REVS
BE BE BE REVS CNFF. 1 SGND CNFF. 2 +5 V CNFF. 3
SVSOL
YW BE RD CN I. 4 CN I. 3 CN I. 2 CN I. 1 N.C. SVSOL2 SVSOL1 +24V
CN H. 1 CN H. 2 CN H. 3 CN H. 4
BK BK BK CN12. 4 CN12. 3 CN12. 2 CN12. 1 BK BK BK +24V SSOL +24V FSOL BK BK BE BE BK BK CNCC. 1 CNCC. 2 SSOL CNDD. 2 +24V CNDD. 1
SSOL
SVS
CN J. 1 SVS CN J. 2 SGND CN J. 3 +5V
BK BK BK BK BK BK BE BE BE CN K. 1 PPS CN K. 2 SGND CN K. 3 +5V BE BE BE
+24V SVSOL1 SVSOL2 +5V SGND SVS +5V SGND PPS
CN 6. 1 CN 6. 2 CN 6. 3 CN 6. 4 CN 6. 5 CN 6. 6 CN 6. 7 CN 6. 8 CN 6. 9
BE BE
CNAA. 1 CNAA. 2
FSOL CNBB. 2 +24V CNBB. 1
FSOL
PPS
Tray unit BKT-SOL

BE BE
BKT-BASE
BE BE BE
TULS CN X. 1 SGND CN X. 2 +5 V CN X. 3
TULS
BK RD BN
PCM
CN11. 1 CN11. 2 CN11. 3 CN11. 4 CN11. 5 CN11. 6 CN11. 7 CN11. 8 YW BE OE BK BN YW OE RD BE PCM A PCM_A PCM B PCM_B +24V +24V CN 7. 1 CN 7. 2 CN 7. 3 CN 7. 4 CN 7. 5 CN 7. 6
TEM+ TEMTLLS SGND +5V TULS SGND +5V
BE BE BK BK BK BE BE BE
BK BK BK
TLLS CN Y. 1 SGND CN Y. 2 +5 V CN Y. 3
TLLS
BE BE
TEM+ CN Z. 2 TEM- CN Z. 1
TEM BKT-PCB
BE BE
CN L. 1 CN L. 2 CN L. 3 CN L. 4 CN L. 5 CN L. 6 CN L. 7 CN L. 8 CN L. 9 CN L.1 CN L.11
PCM A N.C. +24V N.C. PCM_A N.C PCM B N.C. +24V N.C. PCM_B
FRM-TRY
ADM
BE OE RD YW
CN N. 4 CN N. 3 CN N. 2 CN N. 1
CN M. 1 CN M. 2 CN M. 3 CN M. 4
BE BE BE BE
BE BE BE BE
CN 8. 4 CN 8. 3 CN 8. 2 CN 8. 1
BE BE BE BE
Stapler
BKT-PCM
BK
BK
BKT-BASE
PDSOL
BE BE
CN P. 2 PDSOL CN O. 1 CN P. 1 +24V CN O. 2
BE BE
BE BE
+24V CN 9. 1 PDSOL CN 9. 2 N.C. CN 9. 3
CN10.11 CN10.10 CN10. 9 CN10. 8 CN10. 7 CN10. 6 CN10. 5 CN10. 4 CN10. 3 CN10. 2 CN10. 1
STMSTMSTM+ STM+ STCS STES STHPS STLS SGND +5V STSPS
BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE
BE BE BE BE BE BE BE
STMSTMN.C. STM+ STM+ N.C. STCS STES STHPS STLS SGND +5V STSPS
CN U. 1 CN U. 2 CN U. 3 CN U. 4 CN U. 5 CN U. 6 CN U. 7 CN U. 8 CN U. 9 CN U.10 CN U.11 CN U.12 CN U.13
STM STCS STES STHPS STLS STSPS
LGSOL
WE WE
CN R. 3 LGSOL CN Q. 1 CN R. 2 +24V CN Q. 2 CN R. 1 N.C. CN Q. 3
BK BK
BK BK
+24V CN17. 1 LGSOL CN17. 2 BE BE
STY-RV-D
BKT-ST
2-4-7
5H1
FaxSystem(M)
3KH
CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 Specifications..........................................................................................................................................1-1-1 1-1-2 Parts names............................................................................................................................................1-1-3 (1) Main body..........................................................................................................................................1-1-3 (2) Operation panel.................................................................................................................................1-1-4 1-1-3 Mechanical construction .........................................................................................................................1-1-5
1-2 Installation
1-2-1 Installation environment ..........................................................................................................................1-2-1 1-2-2 Unpacking and installation ......................................................................................................................1-2-2 (1) Unpacking .........................................................................................................................................1-2-2 1-2-3 Installing the data backup kit (option) .....................................................................................................1-2-4

1-3-1 Maintenance mode .................................................................................................................................1-3-1 (1) Executing a maintenance item ..........................................................................................................1-3-1 (2) Maintenance mode item list...............................................................................................................1-3-2 (3) Contents of maintenance mode items...............................................................................................1-3-4
1-4 Error Codes

1-4-1 Error codes .............................................................................................................................................1-4-1 (1) Error code..........................................................................................................................................1-4-1 (2) Table of general classification ...........................................................................................................1-4-2 (2-1) U004XX error code table: Interrupted phase B .........................................................................1-4-4 (2-2) U006XX error code table: Problems with the unit .....................................................................1-4-5 (2-3) U008XX error code table: Page transmission error...................................................................1-4-5 (2-4) U009XX error code table: Page reception error ........................................................................1-4-5 (2-5) U010XX error code table: G3 transmission...............................................................................1-4-6 (2-6) U011XX error code table: G3 reception ....................................................................................1-4-8 (2-7) U017XX error code table: V.34 transmission ..........................................................................1-4-10 (2-8) U018XX error code table: V.34 reception................................................................................1-4-10 (2-9) U023XX error code table: Relay command abnormal reception .............................................1-4-10 (2-10) U044XX error code table: Encrypted transmission .................................................................1-4-10
1-5 Troubleshooting
1-5-1 Self-diagnosis .........................................................................................................................................1-5-1 (1) Self-diagnostic function .....................................................................................................................1-5-1 (2) Self diagnostic codes ........................................................................................................................1-5-1
1-6 Requirements on PWB Replacement

1-6-1 Upgrading the firmware on the fax control PWB.....................................................................................1-6-1


2-2-1 Fax control PWB .....................................................................................................................................2-2-1 2-2-2 NCU PWB ...............................................................................................................................................2-2-5
1-1-1
3KH
1-1-2
3KH
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1
Specifications
Type ........................................................... Optional FAX kit Compatibility .............................................. G3 Communication Line .................................. Subscriber telephone line Transmission Time..................................... Less than 3 seconds (33600 bps, JBIG, ITU-T #1 chart) Transmission Speed .................................. 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/ 7200/4800/2400 bps Coding Scheme ......................................... JBIG/MMR/MR/MH Error Correction ......................................... ECM Original Size .............................................. Max. width: 11"/297 mm, Max. length: 63"/1,600 mm Automatic Document Feed ........................ Max. 100 sheets (with optional DP) Scanner Resolution ................................... Horizontal x Vertical 200 x 100 dpi Normal (8 dot/mm x 3.85 line/mm) 200 x 200 dpi Fine (8 dot/mm x 7.7 line/mm) 200 x 400 dpi Super Fine (8 dot/mm x 15.4 line/mm) 400 x 400 dpi Ultra Fine (16 dot/mm x 15.4 line/mm) 600 x 600 dpi Printing Resolution..................................... 600 x 600 dpi Gradations ................................................. 256 shades (Error diffusion) One-Touch Key .......................................... 100 keys Multi-Station Transmission......................... Max. 500 destinations Substitute Memory Reception.................... 7,000 sheets or more (when using ITU-T A4 #1) Image Memory Capacity ............................ Integrated 40 GB hard disk (120 MB of the total memory is used for receiving FAX.) Report Output ............................................ Sent result report, FAX RX result report, Activity report, Status page Option ........................................................ Data backup kit Functions ................................................... See page 1-1-2. NOTE: These specifications are subject to change without notice.
1-1-1
3KH Reception functions Manual reception Automatic reception Fax/telephone auto selection TAD reception D.R.D. reception*1 Remote switching Program dialing Chain dialing Redialing (manual/automatic) Direct feed transmission Memory transmission Bulk fax output Broadcast transmission (up to 500 numbers) Encrypted communication Password check communication Memory fax forwarding Reserved transmission Timer transmission Interrupt transmission Short protocol ECM Subaddress transmission Subaddress-based confidential reception Subaddress-based relay broadcast reception Manual transmission Telephone directory Canceling communication Line monitor Transmission destination display Tone transmission Memory back-up*2 Printing out from FAX box (subaddress-based confidential reception) Communication result display Batch transmission TTI transmission Rotation transmission Duplex transmission*3 Initial communication speed setting Line type setting Zooming communication Memory reception Auto reduce reception Rotation reception Duplex reception Recording paper media type setting Reception date and time recording Reduced size reception Transmission report Reception report Status page Fax box list Cancel of Timer Transmission (in waiting) Smoothing reception Fax priority printout Common address for the machine and FAX
Transmission functions
Communication functions
Additional communication functions
Supplementary communication functions
Supplementary reception functions
Reports
Others
*1: For 120 V specifications only. *2: When optional data backup kit is installed. *3: Available only when optional document processor of the machine is installed.
1-1-2
3KH
1-1-2
Parts names
(1) Main body
Figure 1-1-1 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Operation panel Main power switch MP tray Line connection connector TEL connection connector Document Processor (option) 6. Original eject table 7. Original table 8. Original width guides 9. Top cover 10. Original placement indicator 11. Opening handle
1-1-3
3KH (2) Operation panel
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22.
System Menu key Status/Job Cancel key Program key Counter key Send Key Document Box key Accessibility Display key Print indicator Send indicator Receive indicator Memory indicator Error indicator Help key Logout key Power key Main power indicator Touch panel Numeric keys Clear key Start key Stop key Reset key
1-1-4
3KH
1-1-3
TOUCH PANEL LCD

4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
2 1
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
4 3 2 1
LINPWB
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
YC13
A1
A1
YC8
YC12
IFPWB
A30 A30 B1 B1
FCPWB NCUPWB
B30 B30 1 1 30 1 40 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
YC7
YC30
2 1
OPWB-F
1 2 3 4 5
5 4 3 2 1
SPEAKER
YC31
40 1 34
YC6
YC25
OPWB-M
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
YC4
YC3
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
MPWB
YC10
15
OPWB-L
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
OPWB-U
YC2
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
YC5
YC10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PSPWB
OPWB-R
YC2
Data backup kit (option)
Figure 1-1-2 The fax system consists of the fax control PWB (FCPWB) and NCU PWB (NCUPWB).
1-1-5
3KH
1-1-6
3KH
1-2 Installation
1-2-1
1.
1-2-1
3KH
1-2-2
Unpacking and installation
(1) Unpacking

Figure 1-2-1 Unpacking 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Fax assembly Antistatic air-padded bag Spacer Modular cord*1 Installation guide Operation guide*1 Plastic bag Outer case Barcode labels 10. Ferrite core*1 11. Plastic bag*1 12. Ferrite core*2 13. Air-padded bag*2 14. Terminal seal 15. Alphabet label 16. Clamp *1: 120 V specifications only. *2: 220-240 V specifications only.
1-2-2
3KH Initialization procedure after installation of facsimile system 1. Insert the machine power plug to the wall outlet and turn the main power switch on. 2. Run maintenance item U600. 3. Press [Execute] and then press the start key. 4. Select [Country Code] and enter a destination code using the numeric keys (refer to the destination code list). Enter a destination code with three digits. Code 000 009 080 084 088 108 126 136 137 152 156 Destination Japan Australia Hong Kong Indonesia Israel Malaysia New Zealand Peru Philippines Middle East Singapore Code 159 169 181 242 243 253 Destination South Africa Thailand U.S.A. South America Saudi Arabia CTR21 (European nations) Italy Germany Spain U.K. Netherlands 254 Code 253 Destination Sweden France Austria Switzerland Belgium Denmark Finland Portugal Ireland Norway Taiwan
5. Select [OEM Code] and enter the OEM code (000) and then press the start key. 6. After data initialization, the entered destination, OEM codes and ROM version are displayed. A ROM version displays three kinds, application, boot, and IPL.
MAINTENANCE MODE MAINTENANCE MODE ACTIVE. Initialize: All Data

Country Code OEM Code XXX YYY
U600

Country Code OEM Code APL BOOT IPL XXX YYY **************** **************** ****************
U600
Figure 1-2-2
7. After completing the installation, run a communications test to confirm that the fax system is working correctly.
1-2-3
3KH
1-2-3
Installing the data backup kit (option)
Data backup kit installation requires the following parts: Data backup kit (P/N 1703KJ0UN0) Press the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the Power indicator and the Memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet and remove the modular code. Procedure 1. Remove the screw and then the cover.
Cover
Figure 1-2-3 2. Insert the data backup kit to YC2 connector of the main PWB.
YC2 Data backup kit
Figure 1-2-4 3. Affix the tape (supplied) on the data backup kit so that it will not fall as shown in figure 12-5.
Connector Tape
Data backup kit
Figure 1-2-5 4. Refit the cover using the screw. 1-2-4
3KH
1-3-1
Maintenance mode
Start
Press the stop key.
Yes
No
Yes
End
1-3-1
3KH (2) Maintenance mode item list Section Other Fax Item No. U019 U600 U601 U603 U604 U605 U610 Initializing all data Initializing permanent data Setting user data 1 Setting user data 2 Clearing data Setting system 1 Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100% magnification Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax in the auto reduction mode Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax (A4R/LetterR) in the auto reduction mode Setting system 2 Setting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction Setting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is set Setting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is set Setting system 3 Selecting if auto reduction in the auxiliary direction is to be performed Setting the automatic printing of the protocol list Setting the system 6 Setting the remote switching mode Setting the transmission system 1 Setting the auto redialing interval Setting the number of times of auto redialing U630 Setting communication control 1 Setting the communication starting speed Setting the reception speed Setting the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the sender Setting the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the receiver Setting communication control 2 Setting ECM transmission Setting ECM reception Setting the frequency of the CED signal Setting communication control 3 Setting the DIS signal to 4 bytes Setting the short protocol transmission Setting the reception of a short protocol transmission Setting the CNG detection times in the fax/telephone auto select mode Setting communication control 4 Enabling/disabling V.34 communication Setting the V.34 symbol speed (3429 Hz) Setting the number of times of DIS signal reception Setting the reference for RTN signal output 3 0 0 Content of maintenance item Displaying the ROM version Initial setting* 2 (120 V) 1 (220-240 V)
U611
7 22 26
U612
3 (120 V) 2 (220-240 V) 2 (120 V) 3 (220-240 V) -
U615 U620 U625
U631
U632
U633
*Initial setting for executing maintenance item U020 1-3-2
3KH Item No. U634 U640
Section Fax
Content of maintenance item Setting communication control 5 Setting communication time 1 One-shot detection time for remote switching Continuous detection time for remote switching Setting communication time 2 Setting the T0 time-out time Setting the T1 time-out time Setting the T2 time-out time Setting the Ta time-out time Setting the Tb1 time-out time Setting the Tb2 time-out time Setting the Tc time-out time Setting the Td time-out time Setting modem 1 Setting the G3 transmission cable equalizer Setting the G3 reception cable equalizer Setting the modem detection level Setting modem 2 Modem output level DTMF output level (main value) DTMF output level (level difference)
Initial setting* 0 7 80 56 36 69 30 20 80 60 9 (120 V) 6 (220-240 V) 9 (120 V) 10 (220-240 V) 5 (120 V) 10.5 (220-240 V) 2 (120 V) 2.5 (220-240 V) -
U641
U650
U651
U660
Setting the NCU Setting the connection to PBX/PSTN Setting PSTN dial tone detection Setting busy tone detection Setting for a PBX Setting the loop current detection before dialing Outputting lists Setting the software switches Setting the data backup kit
U670 U699 Other U933
*Initial setting for executing maintenance item U020
1-3-3
3KH (3) Contents of maintenance mode items Maintenance item No. U019 Description Displaying the ROM version Description Displays the part number of the ROM fitted to each PWB. Purpose To check the part number or to decide, if the newest version of ROM is installed. Method 1. Press the start key. The ROM version are displayed. 2. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys Display MAIN MMI ENGINE ENGINE BOOT SCANNER OPTION LANGUAGE DICTIONARY DP LCF OPTION CASSETTE DF MAIN DF MTRAY DF SADDLE DF MAILBOX INNER DF SIMPLE DF MAIN FAX BOOT1 FAX APL1 FAX IPL1 FAX BOOT2 FAX APL2 FAX IPL2 Description Main PWB ROM IC Operation PWB ROM IC Engine PWB ROM IC Engine PWB booting Scanner PWB ROM IC Optional language ROM IC Optional DP main PWB ROM IC Optional 3000-sheet paper feeder main PWB ROM IC Optional paper feeder main PWB ROM IC Optional 3000-sheet document finisher main PWB ROM IC Optional 3000-sheet document finisher internal tray PWB ROM IC Optional centerfold main PWB ROM IC Optional mail box main PWB ROM IC Optional built-in finisher main PWB ROM IC Optional document finisher main PWB ROM IC Fax control PWB booting Fax control PWB APL Fax control PWB IPL -
1-3-4
3KH Maintenance item No. U600
Description Initializing all data Description Initializes software switches and all data in the backup data on the fax control PWB, according to the destination and OEM. Executes the check of the file system, when abnormality of the file system is detected, initializes the file system, communication past record and register setting contents. Purpose To initialize the fax control PWB. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Press [Execute]. The screen for entering the destination code is displayed. 3. Select [Country Code] and enter a destination code using the numeric keys (refer to the destination code list on following for the destination code). 4. Press the start key. The screen for entering the OEM code is displayed. There is no operation necessary on this screen. 5. Press the start key. Data initialization starts. To cancel data initialization, press the stop key. 6. After data initialization, the entered destination, OEM codes and ROM version are displayed. A ROM version displays three kinds, application, boot, and IPL.
U600

U600
Destination code list Code 000 009 080 084 088 108 126 136 137 152 156 Destination Japan Australia Hong Kong Indonesia Israel Malaysia New Zealand Peru Philippines Middle East Singapore Code 159 169 181 242 243 253 Destination South Africa Thailand U.S.A. South America Saudi Arabia CTR21 (European nations) Italy Germany Spain U.K. Netherlands 254 Code 253 Destination Sweden France Austria Switzerland Belgium Denmark Finland Portugal Ireland Norway Taiwan
1-3-5
Description Initializing permanent data Description Initializes software switches on the fax control PWB according to the destination and OEM. Purpose To initialize the fax control PWB without changing user registration data. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Press [Execute]. 3. Select [Country Code] and enter a destination code using the numeric keys (refer to the destination code list on page 1-3-5 for the destination code). 4. Press the start key. The screen for entering the OEM code is displayed. There is no operation necessary on this screen. 5. Press the start key. Data initialization starts. To cancel data initialization, press the back key. 6. After data initialization, the entered destination, OEM codes and ROM version are displayed. A ROM version displays three kinds, application, boot, and IPL.
MAINTENANCE MODE MAINTENANCE MODE ACTIVE. Initialize: Keep Data
U601
MAINTENANCE MODE MAINTENANCE MODE ACTIVE. Initialize: Keep Data

U601
U603
Setting user data 1 Description Makes user settings to enable the use of the machine as a fax. Purpose To be run after installation of the facsimile kit if necessary. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Press [LINE TYPE]. 3. Select the setting. Display DTMF 10 20 Description DTMF 10 PPS 20 PPS
4. Press the start key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-6
Description Setting user data 2 Description Makes user settings to enable the use of the machine as a fax. Purpose Use this if the user wishes to adjust the number of rings that occur before the unit switches into fax receiving mode when fax/telephone auto-select is enabled. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Press [RINGS(F/T)#]. 3. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Description Number of fax/telephone rings Setting range 0 to 15 Initial setting 2 (120 V)/1 (220-240 V)
If you set this to 0, the unit will start fax reception without any ringing. 4. Press the start key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U605 Clearing data Description Initializes data related to the fax transmission such as transmission history. Purpose To clear the transmission history or image data. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Press [CLEAR COM.REC.]. 3. Press the start key. Initialization processing starts. When processing is finished, the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Setting system 1 Description Makes settings for fax reception regarding the sizes of the fax paper and received images and automatic printing of the protocol list. Start 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be set. Display CUT LINE (100%) CUT LINE (AUTO) CUT LINE (A4) Description Sets the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100% magnification. Sets the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax in the auto reduction mode. Sets the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax (A4R/LetterR) in the auto reduction mode.
U610
Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100% magnification Sets the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the recording capacity when recording the data at 100% magnification. If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If over the setting, they are recorded on the next page. 1. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Description Number of lines to be ignored when receiving at 100% Setting range 0 to 22 Initial setting 3 Change in value per step 16 lines
Increase the setting if a blank second page is output, and decrease it if the received image does not include the entire transmitted data. 2. Press the start key. The value is set.
1-3-7
3KH Maintenance item No. U610 (cont.)
Description Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax in the auto reduction mode Sets the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the recording capacity when the data is recorded in the auto reduction mode. If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If over the setting, the entire data on a page is further reduced so that it can be recorded on the same page. 1. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Description Number of lines to be ignored when receiving in the auto reduction mode Setting range 0 to 22 Initial setting 0 Change in value per step 16 lines
Increase the setting if a page received in the reduction mode is over-reduced and too much trailing edge margin is left. Decrease it if the received image does not include all transmitted data. 2. Press the start key. The value is set. Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax (A4R/LetterR) in the auto reduction mode Sets the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the recording capacity when the data is recorded in the auto reduction mode onto A4R or LetterR paper under the conditions below. If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If over the setting, the entire data on a page is further reduced so that it can be recorded on the same page. With A4R present and folio absent in the cassette With letterR paper present and legal paper absent in the cassette 1. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Description Number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax (A4R, letter) in the auto reduction mode Setting range 0 to 22 Initial setting 0 Change in value per step 16 lines
Increase the setting if a page received in the reduction mode is over-reduced and too much trailing edge margin is left. Decrease it if the received image does not include all transmitted data. 2. Press the start key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U611 Setting system 2 Description Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction. Start 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be set. Display ADJ LINES ADJ LINES (A4) ADJ LINES (LT) Description Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction. Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is set. Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is set.
Setting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction. 1. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Description Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction 2. Press the start key. The value is set. Setting range 0 to 22 Initial setting 7
1-3-8
Description Setting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is set Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is set. 1. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Description Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is set Setting range 0 to 22 Initial setting 22
2. Press the start key. The value is set. Setting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is set Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is set. 1. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Description Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is set Setting range 0 to 26 Initial setting 26
2. Press the start key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U612 Setting system 3 Description Makes settings for fax transmission regarding operation and automatic printing of the protocol list. Start 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be set. The screen for the selected item appears. Display AUTO REDUCTION PROTOCOL LIST Description Selects if auto reduction in the auxiliary direction is to be performed. Sets the automatic printing of the protocol list.
Selecting if auto reduction in the auxiliary direction is to be performed Sets whether to receive a long document by automatically reducing it in the auxiliary direction or at 100% magnification. 1. Select the setting. Display ON OFF Description Auto reduction is performed if the received document is longer than the fax paper. Auto reduction is not performed.
2. Press the start key. The setting is set. Setting the automatic printing of the protocol list Sets if the protocol list is automatically printed out. 1. Select the setting. Display OFF ERROR ON Description The protocol list is not printed out automatically. The protocol list is automatically printed out after communication only if a communication error occurs. The protocol list is automatically printed out after communication.
1-3-9
Description Setting the system 6 Description Makes settings for fax reception regarding the sizes of the fax paper and received images. Purpose To set the maximum recording width and processing method when 11" width fax paper is loaded on an inch specification machine. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Press [RX WIDTH FOR 11"]. 3. Select the setting. Display LEDGER B4 Description Communicates to the destination unit 11" width as A3 width and records at 100% magnifications. Communicates to the destination unit 11" width as B4 width.
4. Press the start key. The setting is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U620 Setting the remote switching mode Description Sets the signal detection method for remote switching. Be sure to change the setting according to the type of telephone connected to the machine. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Press [REMOTE MODE]. 3. Select the setting. Display ONE CONT Description One-shot detection Continuous detection
4. Press the start key. The setting is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U625 Setting the transmission system 1 Description Makes settings for the auto redialing interval and the number of times of auto redialing. Purpose Change the setting to prevent the following problems: fax transmission is not possible due to too short redial interval, or fax transmission takes too much time to complete due to too long redial interval. Start 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be set. Setting the auto redialing interval 1. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Description Redialing interval Setting range 1 to 9 (min.) Initial setting 3 (120 V)/2 (220-240 V)
2. Press the start key. The value is set. Setting the number of times of auto redialing 1. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Description Number of redialing Setting range 0 to 9 Initial setting 2 (120 V)/3 (220-240 V)
When set to 0, no redialing is performed. 2. Press the start key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-10
Description Setting communication control 1 Description Makes settings for fax transmission regarding the communication. Start 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be set. The screen for the selected item appears. Display TX SPEED RX SPEED TX ECHO RX ECHO Description Sets the communication starting speed. Sets the reception speed. Sets the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the sender. Sets the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the receiver.
Setting the communication starting speed Sets the initial communication speed when starting transmission. When the destination unit has V.34 capability, V.34 is selected for transmission, regardless of this setting. 1. Select the setting. Display 14400bps/V17 9600bps/V29 4800bps/V27ter 2400bps/V27ter Description V.17, 14400 bps V.17, 9600 bps V.27ter, 4800 bps V.27ter, 2400 bps
2. Press the start key. The setting is set. Setting the reception speed Sets the reception speed that the sender is informed of using the DIS or NSF signal. When the destination unit has V.34 capability, V.34 is selected, regardless of the setting. 1. Select the setting. Display 14400bps 9600bps 4800bps 2400bps Description V.17, V.33, V.29, V.27ter V.29, V.27ter V.27ter V.27ter (fallback only)
2. Press the start key. The setting is set. Setting the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the sender Sets the period before a DCS signal is sent after a DIS signal is received. Used when problems occur due to echoes at the sender. 1. Select the setting. Display 500 300 Description Sends a DCS 500 ms after receiving a DIS. Sends a DCS 300 ms after receiving a DIS.
2. Press the start key. The setting is set. Setting the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the receiver Sets the period before an NSF, CSI or DIS signal is sent after a CED signal is received. Used when problems occur due to echoes at the receiver. 1. Select the setting. Display 500 75 Description Sends an NSF, CSI or DIS 500 ms after receiving a CED. Sends an NSF, CSI or DIS 75 ms after receiving a CED.
1-3-11
Description Setting communication control 2 Description Makes settings regarding fax transmission. Start 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be set. The screen for the selected item appears. Display ECM TX ECM RX CED FREQ. Description Sets ECM transmission. Sets ECM reception. Sets the frequency of the CED signal.
Setting ECM transmission To be set to OFF when reduction of transmission costs is of higher priority than image quality. 1. Select the setting. Display ON OFF Description ECM transmission is enabled. ECM transmission is disabled.
2. Press the start key. The setting is set. Setting ECM reception To be set to OFF when reduction of transmission costs is of higher priority than image quality. 1. Select the setting. Display ON OFF Description ECM reception is enabled. ECM reception is disabled.
2. Press the start key. The setting is set. Setting the frequency of the CED signal Sets the frequency of the CED signal. Used as one of the measures to improve transmission performance for international communications. 1. Select the setting. Display 2100 1100 Description 2100 Hz 1100 Hz
1-3-12
Description Setting communication control 3 Description Makes settings for fax transmission regarding the communication. Start 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be set. The screen for the selected item appears. Display DIS 4BYTE SHORT PROTOCOL TX SHORT PROTOCOL RX NUMBER OF CNG (F/T) Description Sets the DIS signal to 4 bytes. Sets the short protocol transmission. Sets the reception of short protocol transmission. Sets the CNG detection times in the fax/telephone auto select mode.
Setting the DIS signal to 4 bytes Sets if bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are sent. 1. Select the setting. Display ON OFF Description Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are not sent. Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are sent.
2. Press the start key. The setting is set. Setting the short protocol transmission Sets if short protocol transmission is performed. 1. Select the setting. Display ON OFF Description Short protocol transmission is performed. Short protocol transmission is not performed.
2. Press the start key. The setting is set. Setting the reception of a short protocol transmission Selects whether to receive or ignore transmission using short protocol. If a short protocol transmission is received when an auto switching device is attached to the machine, communication problems, including auto switching inability, sometimes occur. Change the setting to ignore short protocol transmission to prevent such problems. 1. Select the setting. Display ON OFF Description Receives short protocol transmission. Ignores short protocol transmission.
2. Press the start key. The setting is set. Setting the CNG detection times in the fax/telephone auto select mode Sets the CNG detection times in the fax/telephone auto select mode. 1. Select the setting. Display 1TIME 2TIMES Description Detects CNG once. Detects CNG twice.
1-3-13
Description Setting communication control 4 Description Makes settings for fax transmission regarding the communication. Purpose To reduce transmission errors when a low quality line is used. Start 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be set. The screen for the selected item appears. Display V.34 V.34-3429Hz DIS 2RES RTN CHECK Description Enables or disables V.34 communication. Sets the V.34 symbol speed (3429 Hz). Sets the number of times of DIS signal reception. Sets the reference for RTN signal output.
Enabling/disabling V.34 communication Sets whether V.34 communication is enabled/disabled for transmission and reception. 1. Select the setting. Display ON TX RX OFF Description V.34 communication is enabled for both transmission and reception. V.34 communication is enabled for transmission only. V.34 communication is enabled for reception only. V.34 communication is disabled for both transmission and reception.
2. Press the start key. The setting is set. Setting the V.34 symbol speed (3429 Hz) Sets if the V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used. 1. Select the setting. Display ON OFF Description V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used. V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is not used.
2. Press the start key. The setting is set. Setting the number of times of DIS signal reception Sets the number of times to receive the DIS signal to once or twice. Used as one of the correction measures for transmission errors and other problems. 1. Select the setting. Display ONCE TWICE Description Responds to the first signal. Responds to the second signal.
2. Press the start key. The setting is set. Setting the reference for RTN signal output Sets the error line rate as the reference for RTN signal output. If transmission errors occur frequently due to the quality of the line, they can be reduced by lowering this setting. 1. Select the setting. Display 5% 10% 15% 20% Description Error line rate of 5% Error line rate of 10% Error line rate of 15% Error line rate of 20%
1-3-14
Description Setting communication control 5 Description Sets the maximum number of error bytes judged acceptable when receiving a TCF signal. Used as a measure to ease transmission conditions if transmission errors occur. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Press [TCF CHECK]. 3. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Description Number of allowed error bytes when detecting TCF Setting range 0 to 255 Initial setting 0
4. Press the start key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U640 Setting communication time 1 Description Sets the detection time when one-shot detection is selected for remote switching. (This setting item will be displayed, but the setting made is ineffective.) Sets the detection time when continuous detection is selected for remote switching. (This setting item will be displayed, but the setting made is ineffective.) Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be set. Display TIME (ONE) TIME (CON) Description Sets the one-shot detection time for remote switching. Sets the continuous detection time for remote switching. Setting range 0 to 255 0 to 255 Initial setting 7 80
3. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. 4. Press the start key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-15
Description Setting communication time 2 Description Sets the time-out time for fax transmission. Purpose Used mainly to improve transmission performance for international communications. Start 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be set. The screen for the selected item appears. Display T0 TIME OUT T1 TIME OUT T2 TIME OUT Ta TIME OUT Tb1 TIME OUT Tb2 TIME OUT Tc TIME OUT Td TIME OUT Description Sets the T0 time-out time. Sets the T1 time-out time. Sets the T2 time-out time. Sets the Ta time-out time. Sets the Tb1 time-out time. Sets the Tb2 time-out time. Sets the Tc time-out time. Sets the Td time-out time.
Setting the T0 time-out time Sets the time before detecting a CED or DIS signal after a dialing signal is sent. Depending on the quality of the exchange, or when the auto select function is selected at the destination unit, a line can be disconnected. Change the setting to prevent this problem. 1. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Description T0 time-out time Setting range 30 to 90 s Initial setting 56
2. Press the start key. The value is set. Setting the T1 time-out time Sets the time before receiving the correct signal after call reception. No change is necessary for this maintenance item. 1. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Description T1 time-out time Setting range 30 to 90 s Initial setting 36
2. Press the start key. The value is set. 3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
1-3-16
Description Setting the T2 time-out time The T2 time-out time decides the following. From CFR signal output to image data reception From image data reception to the next signal reception In ECM, from RNR signal detection to the next signal reception 1. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Description T2 time-out time Setting range 1 to 255 Initial setting 69 Change in value per step 100 ms
2. Press the start key. The value is set. Setting the Ta time-out time In the fax/telephone auto select mode, sets the time to continue ringing an operator through the connected telephone after receiving a call as a fax machine (see figure 1-3-1). A fax signal is received within the Ta set time, or the fax mode is selected automatically when the time elapses. In fax/telephone auto select mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call. 1. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Description Ta time-out time Setting range 1 to 255
Ring back tone send start
Initial setting 30
2. Press the start key. The value is set.

Start of fax reception
Ring detection
Line connection as a fax machine
Rings
Tb1
Ta
Tb2
Figure 1-3-1 Ta/Tb1/Tb2 time-out time Setting the Tb1 time-out time In the fax/telephone auto select mode, sets the time to start sending the ring back tone after receiving a call as a fax machine (see figure 1-3-1). In fax/telephone auto select mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call. 1. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Description Tb1 time-out time Setting range 1 to 255 Initial setting 20 Change in value per step 100 ms
2. Press the start key. The value is set. Setting the Tb2 time-out time In the fax/telephone auto select mode, sets the time to start ringing an operator through the connected telephone after receiving a call as a fax machine (see figure 1-3-1). In the fax/telephone auto select mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call. 1. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Description Tb2 time-out time Setting range 1 to 255 Initial setting 80 Change in value per step 100 ms
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
1-3-17
Description Setting the Tc time-out time In the TAD mode, set the time to check if there are any triggers for shifting to fax reception after a connected telephone receives a call. Only the telephone function is available if shifting is not made within the set Tc time. In the TAD mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call. 1. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Description Tc time-out time Setting range 1 to 255 s Initial setting 60
2. Press the start key. The value is set. Setting the Td time-out time Sets the length of the time required to determine silent status (fax), one of the triggers for Tc time check. In the TAD mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call. Be sure not to set it too short; otherwise, the mode may be shifted to fax while the unit is being used as a telephone. 1. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Description Td time-out time Setting range 1 to 255 s Initial setting 9 (120 V)/6 (220-240 V)
2. Press the start key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-18
Description Setting modem 1 Description Sets the G3 cable equalizer. Sets the modem detection level. Start 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be set. The screen for the selected item appears. Display REG. G3 TX EQR REG. G3 RX EQR RX MODEM LEVEL Description Sets the G3 transmission cable equalizer. Sets the G3 reception cable equalizer. Sets the modem detection level.
Setting the G3 transmission cable equalizer Perform the following adjustment to make the equalizer compatible with the line characteristics. 1. Select the setting. Display 0dB 4dB 8dB 12dB Description 0dB 4dB 8dB 12dB
2. Press the start key. The setting is set. Setting the G3 reception cable equalizer Perform the following adjustment to make the equalizer compatible with the line characteristics. 1. Select the setting. Display 0dB 4dB 8dB 12dB Description 0dB 4dB 8dB 12dB
2. Press the start key. The setting is set. Setting the modem detection level To improve the transmission performance when a low quality line is used. 1. Select the setting. Display 33dBm 38dBm 43dBm 48dBm Description -33 dBm -38 dBm -43 dBm -48 dBm
1-3-19
Description Setting modem 2 Description Sets the modem output level. Sets the DTMF output level of a push-button dial telephone. Purpose Used if problems occur when sending a signal with a push-button dial telephone. Start 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be set. Display SGL LEVEL MODEM DTMF LEV(CENT) DTMF LEV(DIFF) Description Modem output level DTMF output level (main value) DTMF output level (level difference) Setting range 0 to 15 0 to 15.0 0 to 5.5 Initial setting 9 (120 V) 10 (220-240 V) 5 (120 V) 10.5 (220-240 V) 2 (120 V) 2.5 (220-240 V)
3. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. 4. Press the start key. The setting is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-20
Description Setting the NCU Description Makes setting regarding the network control unit (NCU). Purpose To be set when installing the facsimile kit. Start 1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. 2. Select the item to be set. The screen for the selected item appears. Display EXCHANGE DIAL TONE BUSY TONE PBX SETTING DC LOOP Description Sets the connection to PBX/PSTN. Sets PSTN dial tone detection. Sets busy tone detection. Setting for a PBX. Sets the loop current detection before dialing.
Setting the connection to PBX/PSTN Selects if a fax is to be connected to either a PBX or public switched telephone network. 1. Select the setting. Display PSTN PBX Description Connected to the public switched telephone network. Connected to a PBX.
2. Press the start key. The setting is set. Setting PSTN dial tone detection Selects if the dial tone is detected to check the telephone is off the hook when a fax is connected to a public switched telephone network. 1. Select the setting. Display ON OFF Description Detects the dial tone. Does not detect the dial tone.
2. Press the start key. The setting is set. Setting busy tone detection When a fax signal is sent, sets whether the line is disconnected immediately after a busy tone is detected, or the busy tone is not detected and the line remains connected until T0 time-out time. Fax transmission may fail due to incorrect busy tone detection. When set to 2, this problem may be prevented. However, the line is not disconnected within the T0 time-out time even if the destination line is busy. 1. Select the setting. Display ON OFF Description Detects busy tone. Does not detect busy tone.
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
1-3-21
Description Setting for a PBX Selects the mode to connect an outside call when connected to a PBX. According to the type of the PBX connected, select the mode to connect an outside call. 1. Select the setting. Display EARTH FLASH LOOP Description Earth mode Flashing mode Code number mode
2. Press the start key. The setting is set. Setting the loop current detection before dialing Sets if the loop current detection is performed before dialing. 1. Select the setting. Display ON OFF Description Performs loop current detection before dialing. Does not perform loop current detection before dialing.
2. Press the start key. The setting is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U670 Outputting lists Description Outputs a list of data regarding fax transmissions. Purpose To check conditions of use, settings and transmission procedures of the fax. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be output. 3. Press the start key. The selected list is output. Display SETTING LIST ACTION LIST SELF ST REPORT PROTOCOL LIST ERROR LIST Description Outputs a list of software switches, self telephone number, confidential boxes, ROM versions and other information. Outputs a list of error history, transmission line details and other information. Outputs a list of settings in maintenance mode (own-status report) regarding fax transmission only. Outputs a list of transmission procedures. Outputs a list of error.
U699
Setting the software switches Description Sets the software switches on the fax control PWB individually. Purpose To change the setting when a problem such as split output of received originals occurs. Since the communication performance is largely affected, normally this setting need not be changed. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Press [SW No.]. 3. Enter the desired software switch number (3 digits) using the numeric keys and press the enter key. 4. Use numeric keys 7 to 0 to switch each bit between 0 and 1. 5. Press the start key to set the value. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-22
Description List of Software Switches of Which the Setting Can Be Changed <System setting> No. 39 Bit Item 21 Declaration of reception size in automatic paper source selection for fax
<Communication control procedure> No. 31 Bit Item 2 Automatic reception level adjustment (V. 17) 1 Automatic reception level adjustment (V. 29) 0 Automatic reception level adjustment (V. 27ter) 36 37 7654 Coding format in transmission 3210 Coding format in reception 5 33600 bps/V34 4 31200 bps/V34 3 28800 bps/V34 2 26400 bps/V34 1 24000 bps/V34 0 21600 bps/V34 38 7 19200 bps/V34 6 16800 bps/V34 5 14400 bps/V34 4 12000 bps/V34 3 9600 bps/V34 2 7200 bps/V34 1 4800 bps/V34 0 2400 bps/V34 41 42 43 3 FSK detection in V.8 2 FIF length in transmission of more than 4 times of DIS/DTC signal 0 Automatic reception level adjustment (V. 33) 76543210 Adjustment width in automatic reception level adjustment
1-3-23
Description List of Software Switches of Which the Setting Can Be Changed <Communication time setting> No. 53 54 55 60 63 64 66 67 68 Bit Item 76543210 T3 timeout setting 76543210 T4 timeout setting (automatic equipment) 76543210 T5 timeout setting 76543210 Time before transmission of CNG (1100 Hz) signal 76543210 T0 timeout setting (manual equipment) 7 Phase C timeout in ECM reception 76543210 Timeout 1 in countermeasures against echo 76543210 Timeout 2 in countermeasures against echo 76543210 Timeout for FSK detection start in V.8
<Modem setting> No. 89 <NCU setting> No. 121 122 Bit Item 7654 Dial tone/busy tone detection pattern 7654 Busy tone detection pattern 2 Dial tone detection before dialing 1 Busy tone detection in automatic FAX/TEL switching 125 126 127 76543210 Access code registration for connection to PSTN 7654 FAX/TEL automatic switching ringback tone ON/OFF cycle 10 Pseudo-ringer duty ratio Bit Item 76543 RX gain adjust
<Calling time setting> No. 133 134 141 142 143 144 145 147 148 149 151 Bit Item 76543210 DTMF signal transmission time 76543210 DTMF signal pause time 76543210 Ringer detection cycle (minimum) 76543210 Ringer detection cycle (maximum) 76543210 Ringer ON time detection 76543210 Ringer OFF time detection 76543210 Ringer OFF non-detection time 76543210 Dial tone detection time (continuous tone) 76543210 Allowable dial tone interruption time 76543210 Time for transmitting selection signal after closing the DC circuit 76543210 Ringer frequency detection invalid time
1-3-24
Description Setting the data backup kit Description Initializes optional data backup kit (CF) and restore the backup data. Purpose To initialize the CF when call for service (C0700) occurs. Also, to restore data when the hard disk has been damaged. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item. Display INITIALIZE CF FAX IMAGE JOB ACCOUNTING Description Initializes the data backup kit (CF) and backs up the job accounting data in the hard disk into the data backup kit (CF). Prints the fax reception data backed up in the data backup kit (CF). Restores the job accounting data stored in the data backup kit (CF) to the hard disk.
Method: Initialization of CF 1. Select [INITIALIZE CF]. 2. Press the start key. CF is initialized. 3. Turn the main power switch off and on. Method: Printing the fax image 1. Select [FAX IMAGE]. 2. Press [EXECUTE]. 3. Press the start key. The fax reception data is printed out. Method: Restoration of data of the hard disk 1. Select [JOB ACCOUNTING]. 2. Press the start key. The job accounting data is restored. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-25
3KH
1-3-26
3KH
1-4 Error Codes
1-4-1
Error codes
(1) Error code Error codes are listed on the communication reports, activity report, etc. The codes consist of an error code indication U followed by a 5-digit number. (Error codes for V34 communication errors start with an E indication, followed by five digits.) The upper three of the five digits indicate general classification of the error and its cause, while the lower two indicate the detailed classification. Items for which detailed classification is not necessary have 00 as the last two digits.
Error code
UXXXXX
Detailed classification of error code General classification of error code Error code indication
1-4-1
3KH (2) Table of general classification Error code U00000 U00100 U00200 U00300 U004XX U00500 U006XX U00700 U008XX U009XX U010XX U011XX U01400 U01500 U01600 U017XX U018XX U02000 U02100 U02200 Description No response or busy after the set number of redials. Transmission was interrupted by a press of the stop/clear key. Reception was interrupted by a press of the stop/clear key. Recording paper on the destination unit has run out during transmission. A connection was made but interrupted during handshake with the receiver unit (refer to page 1-44 U004XX error code table). Multiple communication was interrupted and call was not made on destination units after interruption. Communication was interrupted because of a machine problem (refer to page 1-4-5 U006XX error code table). Communication was interrupted because of a problem in the destination unit. A page transmission error occurred in G3 mode (refer to page 1-4-5 U008XX error code table). A page reception error occurred in G3 mode (refer to page 1-4-5 U009XX error code table). Transmission in G3 mode was interrupted by a signal error (refer to page 1-4-6 U010XX error code table). Reception in G3 mode was interrupted by a signal error (refer to page 1-4-8 U011XX error code table). An invalid one-touch key was specified during communication. A communication error occurred when calling in V.8 mode. A communication error occurred when called in V.8 mode. A communication error occurred before starting T.30 protocol during transmission in V.34 mode (refer to page 1-4-10 U017XX error code table). A communication error occurred before starting T.30 protocol during reception in V.34 mode (refer to page 1-4-10 U018XX error code table). Relay broadcast was refused by a relay station because of a mismatch in permit ID number and permit telephone number when a relay command was issued. A relay command failed because the destination unit (relay station) had no relay broadcast capability. A relay command from a command station failed because a telephone number that was not registered in the relay station was specified. Or, relay broadcast was requested to a relay station but failed because a telephone number that was not registered in the relay station was specified. Or, Subaddress-based relay broadcast transmission failed because the data registered in the Subaddress relay box was deleted. Receiving station information was not normally received in reception of a relay command (refer to page 1-4-10 U023XX error code table). An interoffice subaddress-based relay transmission was interrupted because of a mismatch in the specified relay box number. No document was present in the destination unit when polling reception started. In reverse polling, although no original was set in the destination unit, transmission was complete. In confidential polling reception, data was not accumulated in the specified box in the destination unit. Or, in interoffice subaddress-based bulletin board reception, data was not stored in the box specified by the destination unit. In polling reception from a unit of our make, operation was interrupted due to a mismatch in permit ID or telephone number. Or, in interoffice subaddress-based bulletin board reception, operation was interrupted due to a mismatch in permit ID or telephone number.
U023XX U02400 U03000 U03100 U03200
U03300
1-4-2
3KH Error code U03400 U03500 Description Polling reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in individual numbers (destination unit is either of our make or by another manufacturer). In confidential polling reception, the specified confidential box No. was not registered in the destination. Or, in interoffice subaddress-based bulletin board reception, the specified Subaddress confidential box number was not registered in the destination unit. Or, the destination was being accessed. Confidential polling reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in specified confidential box No. Or, an interoffice subaddress-based bulletin board reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in the specified subaddress confidential box number. Confidential polling reception failed because the destination unit had no confidential polling transmission capability or data was not accumulated in any box in the destination unit. Or, interoffice subaddress-based bulletin board reception failed because the destination unit had no subaddressbased bulletin board transmission capability, or data was not stored in any subaddress confidential box in the destination unit. The confidential box specified for confidential transmission was not registered in the destination unit. Or, in interoffice subaddress-based transmission mode, the specified subaddress box number was not registered in the destination unit. Or, the destination was being accessed. Confidential transmission failed because the destination unit had no confidential capability. Or, subaddress-based transmission failed because the destination unit had no subaddress-based reception capability. In encrypted transmission, the specified encryption box was not registered in the destination unit. Encrypted transmission failed because the destination unit had no encrypted communication capability. Communication was interrupted because of an encryption key error during encrypted transmission (refer to page 1-4-10 U044XX error code table). Encrypted reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in encryption keys. In transmission with a specified number, the set number of originals was different from the number of transmitted originals. Password check transmission or restricted transmission was interrupted because the permit IDs did not agree with. Password check reception or restricted reception was interrupted because the permit IDs did not match, the rejected FAX numbers did match, or the destination receiver did not return its phone number. The password check reception or the restricted reception was interrupted because the permitted numbers did not match, the rejected numbers did match, or the machine in question did not acknowledge its phone number. G3 communication was attempted but failed because the destination unit was a G2 machine. Relay broadcast was requested from a command station but memory overflowed during reception. Or, in subaddress-based relay reception, memory overflowed. Relay was commanded but memory overflowed in the destination unit (relay station). Memory overflowed during confidential reception. Or, in subaddress-based confidential reception, memory overflowed. Memory overflowed in the destination unit during confidential transmission. Or, in interoffice subaddress-based transmission, memory overflowed in the destination unit. Memory overflowed during memory reception. Memory overflowed in the destination unit during transmission. Memory transmission failed because a decoding error occurred. Transmission failed because an error occurred during JBIG encoding. Reception failed because an error occurred during JBIG decoding.
U03600
U03700
U04000
U04100
U04200 U04300 U044XX U04500 U05000 U05100 U05200 U05300
U09000 U12000 U12100 U14000 U14100 U19000 U19100 U19200 U19300 U19400
1-4-3
3KH (2-1) U004XX error code table: Interrupted phase B Error code U00420 U00421 U00430 Description A relay request was received from the host center but interrupted because of a mismatch in permit ID or telephone number. Subaddress-based relay reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in the specified subaddress relay box number. Polling request (confidential or reverse) was received but interrupted because of a mismatch in permit number. Or, subaddress-based bulletin board transmission request was received but interrupted because of a mismatch in permit ID in the transmitting unit. Confidential polling transmission was interrupted because the specified confidential box No. was not registered. Or, an subaddress-based bulletin board transmission was interrupted because the specified subaddress confidential box was not registered. Confidential polling transmission was interrupted because of a mismatch in confidential box ID number. Or, an subaddress-based bulletin board transmission was interrupted because of a mismatch in Subaddress confidential box numbers. Confidential polling request was received but data was not present in the confidential box. Or, subaddress-based bulletin board transmission request was received but data was not present in the subaddress confidential box. Confidential polling request was received but interrupted because the specified confidential box No. was intended for encryption. Confidential polling request was received but interrupted because the specified confidential box was being accessed. Or, subaddress-based bulletin board transmission request was received but interrupted because the specified subaddress confidential box was being accessed. Confidential reception was interrupted because the specified confidential box No. was not registered. Or, subaddress-based confidential reception or subaddress-based relay reception was interrupted because the specified subaddress box was not registered. Or, subaddress based confidential reception or subaddress relay command reception was interrupted because the specified subaddress box No. was being accessed. Confidential reception was interrupted because the specified confidential box No. was intended for encryption. The destination transmitter disconnected because the permit IDs did not agree with while the destination transmitter is in password-check transmission or restricted transmission. Encrypted reception was interrupted because the specified encryption box number was not registered. Or, encrypted reception request was received but interrupted because the specified encryption box was being accessed. Encrypted reception was interrupted because the encryption key for the specified encryption box was not registered.
U00431
U00432
U00433
U00434 U00435
U00440
U00441 U00450 U00460
U00462
1-4-4
3KH (2-2) U006XX error code table: Problems with the unit Error code U00600 U00601 U00602 U00603 U00604 U00610 U00611 U00613 U00614 U00615 U00620 U00622 U00655 U00656 U00670 U00677 U00690 The document processor cover is open. Document jam or the document length exceeds the maximum. Image scanning section problem. No document feed. Document length exceeded the limit of the bitmap memory capacity. Recording section cover is open. Recording paper JAM Image writing section problem Nearly empty of recording paper Empty of recording paper Copier fixing unit problem Copier drive motor problem CTS was not activated after RTS due to a modem error. Data was not transmitted after CTS was activated due to a modem error. Power was cut off during communication. There was no file to transmit in the memory transmission mode. System error. Description
(2-3) U008XX error code table: Page transmission error Error code U00800 U00810 Description A page transmission error occurred because of reception of a RTN or PIN signal. A page transmission error reoccurred after retry of transmission in the ECM mode.
(2-4) U009XX error code table: Page reception error Error code U00900 U00910 Description An RTN or PIN signal was transmitted because of a page reception error. A page reception error remained after retry of transmission in the ECM mode.
1-4-5
3KH (2-5) U010XX error code table: G3 transmission Error code U01000 Description An FTT signal was received for a set number of times after TCF signal transmission at 2400 bps. Or, an RTN signal was received in response to a Q signal (excluding EOP) after transmission at 2400 bps. Function of the unit differs from that indicated by a DIS signal. No relevant signal was received after transmission of a DNL (MPS or EOM) signal, and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded (between units of our make). No relevant signal was received after transmission of a DCS, TCF signal, and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded. No relevant signal was received after transmission of an NSS1, NSS2 (TCF) signal, and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded (between units of our make). No relevant signal was received after transmission of an NSS3, TCF signal, and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded (between units of our make). No relevant signal was received after transmission of an MPS signal, and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded. No relevant signal was received after transmission of an EOM signal, and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded. An MCF signal was received but no DIS signal was received after transmission of an EOM signal, and T1 timeout was detected. No relevant signal was received after transmission of an EOP signal, and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded. No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PRI-EOP signal, and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded. No relevant signal was received after transmission of a CNC signal, and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded (between units of our make). No relevant signal was received after transmission of a CTC signal, and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM). No relevant signal was received after transmission of an EOR.Q signal, and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM). No relevant signal was received after transmission of an RR signal, and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM). No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PSS.NULL signal, and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM). No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PSS.MPS signal, and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM). No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PPS.EOM signal, and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM). No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PPS.EOP signal, and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM). No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PPS.PRI-EOP signal, and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM). T5 time-out was detected during ECM transmission (ECM). A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received during standby for DIS signal reception. A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DNL (MPS or EOM) signal (between units of our make). A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DCS, TCF signal.
U01001 U01010 U01011 U01012 U01013 U01014 U01015 U01016 U01017 U01018 U01019 U01020 U01021 U01022 U01023 U01024 U01025 U01026 U01027 U01028 U01040 U01041 U01042
1-4-6
3KH Error code U01043 U01044 U01045 U01046 U01047 U01048 U01049 U01050 U01051 U01052 U01053 U01054 U01055 U01056 U01057 U01070 U01071 U01072 U01073 U01080 U01091 Description A DCN signal was received after transmission of an NSS1, NSS2 (TCF) signal (between units of our make). A DCN signal was received after transmission of an NSS3, TCF signal (between units of our make). A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received after transmission of an MPS signal. A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received after transmission of an EOM signal. A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received after transmission of an EOP signal. A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PRI-EOP signal. A DCN signal was received after transmission of a CNC signal (between units of our make). A DCN signal was received after transmission of a CTC signal (ECM). A DCN signal was received after transmission of an EOR.Q signal (ECM). A DCN signal was received after transmission of an RR signal (ECM). A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPS.NULL signal (ECM). A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPS.MPS signal (ECM). A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPS.EOM signal (ECM). A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPS.EOP signal (ECM). A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPS.PRI-EOP signal (ECM). Polarity reversal was detected during handshake. Polarity reversal was detected during message transmission. A break in loop current was detected during transmission. During reverse polling in V.34 mode at the receiver unit, a CM signal was not detected when transmitting after reception. A PIP signal was received after transmission of a PPS.NULL signal. During transmission in V.34 mode, communication was interrupted because a PPR signal was received over 10 times even after reducing the communication speed to the minimum with the symbol speed maintained at the level of connection. During transmission in V.34 mode, communication was interrupted because of an impossible combination of the symbol speed and communication speed.
U01092
1-4-7
3KH (2-6) U011XX error code table: G3 reception Error code U01100 U01101 U01102 U01110 U01111 U01112 U01113 U01114 U01115 U01116 U01117 U01118 U01119 U01120 U01121 U01122 U01123 U01124 U01125 U01126 U01127 U01128 U01129 U01140 U01141 U01142 U01143 U01144 U01145 U01146 U01147 U01148 U01149 U01150 U01151 U01152 U01153 Description Function of the unit differs from that indicated by a DCS signal. Function of the unit (excl. communication mode select) differs from that indicated by an NSS signal. A DTC (NSC) signal was received when no transmission data was in the unit. No response after transmission of a DIS signal. No response after transmission of a DTC (NSC) signal. No training reception after reception of a DCS or NSS signal. No response after transmission of an FTT signal. No message reception after transmission of a CFR signal. No message reception after transmission of an MCF signal. No message reception after transmission of a PPR signal. No message reception after transmission of a CTR signal. No message reception after transmission of an ERR signal. No further signals were received after reception of a message. No response after transmission of an MCF signal. No response after transmission of an RTP signal. No response after transmission of an RTN signal. No response after transmission of a PIP signal. No response after transmission of a PIN signal. No response after transmission of a CNS signal (between units of our make). No response after transmission of a PPR signal (ECM). No response after transmission of an ERR signal (ECM). No response after transmission of an RNR signal (ECM). No response after transmission of an SPA signal (short protocol). A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DIS signal. A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DTC signal. A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DCS or NSS signal. A DCN signal was received after transmission of an FTT signal. A DCN signal was received after transmission of a CFR signal. A DCN signal was received after reception of a message. A DCN signal was received after transmission of an MCF signal (interoffice communication after reception of an MPS, EOM signal or confidential interoffice communication). A DCN signal was received after transmission of an RTP signal. A DCN signal was received after transmission of an RTN signal. A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PIP signal. A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PIN signal. A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPR signal (ECM). A DCN signal was received after transmission of a CTR signal (ECM). A DCN signal was received after transmission of an ERR signal (ECM).
1-4-8
3KH Error code U01154 U01155 U01160 U01161 U01162 U01163 U01164 U01170 U01172 U01191 U01199 Description A DCN signal was received after transmission of an RNR signal (ECM). A DCN signal was received after transmission of an SPA signal (short protocol). During message reception, transmission time exceeded the maximum transmission time per line. Number of error lines exceeded limits during message reception. A break in loop current was detected during message reception. Polarity reversal was detected during message reception. One page length exceeded the specified length during message reception. A decoding error occurred during MMR message reception. During reverse polling in V.34 mode at the transmitting unit, a JM signal was not detected after transmission of a CM signal when receiving after transmission. Communication was interrupted because an error occurred during an image data reception sequence in the V.34 mode. A DIS signal with different FIF was received after transmission of a DIS signal.
1-4-9
3KH (2-7) U017XX error code table: V.34 transmission Error code U01700 U01720 U01721 Description A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing). A communication error occurred in phase 4 (modem parameter exchange). Operation was interrupted due to the absence of a common communication speed between units.
U01700: A communication error that occurs at the transmitting unit in the period after transmission of INFO0 before entering phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training). For example, INFO0/A/Abar (B/Bbar, for polling transmission)/ INFOh was not detected. U01720: A communication error that occurs at the transmitting unit in the period after initiating the control channel before entering the T.30 process. For example, PPh/ALT/MPh/E was not detected. U01721: In the absence of a common communication speed between units (including when an impossible combination of communication speed and symbol speed occurs) after MPh exchange; 1) a DCN signal was received from the destination unit, and the line was cut; or 2) a DIS (NSF, CSI) signal was received from the destination unit and, in response to the signal, the unit transmitted a DCN signal, and the line was cut. (2-8) U018XX error code table: V.34 reception Error code U01800 U01810 U01820 U01821 Description A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing). A communication error occurred in phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training). A communication error occurred in phase 4 (modem parameter exchange). Operation was interrupted due to the absence of a common communication speed between units.
U01800: A communication error that occurs at the receiver unit in the period after transmission of INFO0 before entering phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training). For example, INFO0/B/Bbar (A/Abar, for polling reception)/probing tone was not detected. U01810: A communication error that occurs at the receiver unit in phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training). For example, S/Sbar/PP/TRN was not detected. U01820: A communication error that occurs at the receiver unit in the period after initiating the control channel before entering the T.30 process. For example, PPh/ALT/MPh/E was not detected. U01821: In the absence of a common communication speed between units (including when an impossible combination of communication speed and symbol speed occurs) after MPh exchange, a DCN signal was transmitted to the destination unit and the line was cut. (2-9) U023XX error code table: Relay command abnormal reception Error code U02303 U02304 Description Timeout was detected before a correct DNL signal was received. A signal other than MPS or EOM signal was received after a DNL signal was received.
(2-10) U044XX error code table: Encrypted transmission Error code U04400 U04401 Description Encrypted transmission was interrupted because encryption keys did not agree. Calling failed during encrypted transmission because the encryption key was not registered.
1-4-10
3KH
1-5 Troubleshooting
1-5-1
Self-diagnosis
(1) Self-diagnostic function This unit is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, printing is disabled and the problem displayed as a code consisting of C followed by a number, indicating the nature of the problem. A message is also displayed requesting the user to call for service. After removing the problem, the self-diagnostic function can be reset by turning front cover/feed cover switch off and back on. (2) Self diagnostic codes Remarks Code C0030 Contents Fax control PWB system problem Processing with the fax software was disabled due to a hardware or software problem. Fax control PWB incompatibility detection problem Fax software is not compatible with main software. Flash ROM program area checksum error A checksum error occurred with the program in the Flash ROM on the fax control PWB. CF error for backup Optional data backup kit (CF) is not suitable as backup. Fax control PWB to main PWB high capacity data transfer problem High-capacity data transfer between the fax control PWB and the main PWB of the machine was not normally performed even if the data transfer was retried the specified times. Causes Defective fax control PWB. Check procedures/corrective measures Replace the fax control PWB and verify the operation.
C0070
FAX and the machine are not compatible. Defective fax control PWB.
Use the FAX control PWB that is designed for use with the machine.
C0830
Replace the fax control PWB and check for correct operation.
C0700
CF installed incorrectly. Defective CF. Poor contact in the connector terminals.
Install CF correctly. Install normal CF. Check the connection of connector YC1 on the fax control PWB and YC4 on the interface PWB, connection of connector YC30 on the main PWB and YC6 on the interface PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Replace the fax control PWB or main PWB and check for correct operation. Replace the fax control PWB and check for correct operation.
C0870
Defective fax control PWB or main PWB. Defective fax control PWB.
C0880
Fax control PWB program archive problem When power is turned on, the compressed program in the Flash ROM on the fax control PWB was not successfully decompressed. Fax file system error The backup data is not retained for file system abnormality of flash memory of the fax control PWB.
C0920
Defective fax control PWB.
Replace the fax control PWB and verify the operation.
F090
Defective main Communication error between main PWB. PWB and Fax control PWB A communication error between fax control PWB and main PWB is detected.
Turn the main power switch off and then back on again. If the problem still remains, replace the main PWB.
1-5-1
3KH
1-5-2
3KH
1-6 Requirements on PWB Replacement
1-6-1
Upgrading the firmware on the fax control PWB
Firmware upgrading requires the following tools: Compact Flash (Products manufactured by SANDISK are recommended.) or USB memory NOTE When writing data to a new Compact Flash from a computer, be sure to format it in advance. Procedure 1. Press the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the Power indicator and the Memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet. 2. Insert Compact Flash or USB memory in a notch hole of the machine. The Compact Flash must be inserted into the machine with its rear side facing up. 3. Insert the power plug and turn the main power switch on. Upgrading firmware starts. Caution: Never turn the main power switch off during upgrading.
Compact Flash
USB memory
Figure 1-6-1 4. "Completed" is displayed on the touch panel when upgrading is complete. 5. Press the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the Power indicator and the Memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet. 6. Remove Compact Flash or USB memory from the machine. 7. Insert the power plug and turn the main power switch on.
1-6-1
3KH
1-6-2
3KH
2-1-1
1 2
Figure 2-1-1 1. 2. Fax control PWB (FCPWB).......................... Modulates, demodulates, compresses, decompresses and smoothes out image data, and converts resolution of image data. NCU PWB (NCUPWB)................................. Controls connection to the telephone line.
2-1-1
3KH
2-1-2
3KH
2-2-1
Fax control PWB
FCPWB
SDRAM (Upper/Lower) 32MBx128Mbitx2 U31 U32
32bit Data bus RESETn Address bus Machine RESETn Main PWB (via interface PWB) +5.0V +3.3V Speaker control ASIC (U21) READY TELSEL EARTH DCCONT NCU PWB
CPU (U11) 200MHz
RESET IC (U73)
MDMRESn 16bit CPUCLK
Oscillator (U41) 16bit Flash ROM (Upper/Lower) 16MBx64Mbitx2 U33 U34 RESET
MODEM (U51)
DAA U52 U61
Analog I/F
LINE1 LINE2
Figure 2-2-1 Fax control PWB block diagram
2-2-1
3KH
YC3
U33 U34 U11 U21
YC1
U61
U31
U32
U41 U51
Figure 2-2-2 Fax control PWB silk-screen diagram
2-2-2
3KH Connector YC1 Connected to the machine main PWB (via interface PWB) Pin No. Signal A1 NC A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 A26 A27 A28 A29 A30 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 NC AUDIO +3.3 V GND A13 A11 A9 GND A6 A4 A2 GND OP2IFn OP2IRn RDY GND IORn RESETn D15 GND D12 D10 D8 GND D5 D3 D1 GND NC NC TXDREQ +3.3V A15 A14 A12 A10 A8 A7 A5 A3 A1 +3.3V OP2ACKn +5V RXDREQ RXDMACKn IOWn I/O O I I I I I I I O I I I I I I I I I I O I I I I I I I I I O I O I I Voltage 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC Not used Not used Speaker control signal 3.3 V DC supply Ground Not used Address bus A11 Address bus A9 Ground Address bus A6 Address bus A4 Address bus A2 Ground Fax control signal Fax control signal Fax ready signal Ground Fax control signal Reset signal Data signal D15 Ground Data signal D12 Data signal D10 Data signal D8 Ground Data signal D5 Data signal D3 Data signal D1 Ground Not used Not used DREQ transmission signal 3.3 V DC supply Address bus A15 Not used Not used Address bus A10 Address bus A8 Address bus A7 Address bus A5 Address busA3 Address bus A1 3.3 V DC supply Fax control signal 5 V DC supply DREQ reception signal DMACK reception signal Fax control signal 2-2-3 Description
3KH Connector YC1 Connected to the machine main PWB (via interface PWB) Pin No. Signal B19 TXDMACKn B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 B26 B27 B28 B29 B30 YC3 Connected to the NCU PWB. A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A15 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B10 B12 B13 D14 D13 D11 D9 D7 D6 D4 D2 D0 NC NC LINE1 LINE1 N.C. N.C. N.C. GND GND GND GND GND GND +5VDC +5VDC +5VDC LINE2 LINE2 N.C. N.C. N.C. TELSEL EARTH TELOFHKn DCCONT I/O I I I I I I I I I I I/O I/O O O O I/O I/O O O I O Voltage 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC Description DMACK transmission signal Data signal D14 Data signal D13 Data signal D11 Data signal D9 Data signal D7 Data signal D6 Data signal D4 Data signal D2 Data signal D0 Not used Not used Line signal Line signal Not used Not used Not used Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground 5 V DC supply 5 V DC supply 5 V DC supply Line signal Line signal Not used Not used Not used TEL SEL signal Ground start control signal (220-240 V specifications only) External line off-hook signal DC/DC converter control signal (220-240 V specifications only)
2-2-4
3KH
2-2-2
NCU PWB
Accounting pulse elimination circuit C041, C042 C043 Ground start circuit DB20, PC20 Surge absorption section V10, V12 V11
FCPWB
LINE1 LINE2
Noise fileter circuit C038, C039
Noise fileter circuit
Line (modular connector)
EARTH
TELOFHKn External telephone off-hook detection circuit TEL SEL
U11 Relay circuit Q10 Tel (modular connector)
DCCONT
DC/DC converter on/off circuit Q48, Q49 DC/DC converter circuit Q47 Off-hook detection circuit photo coupler PC40
TEL_DET1 TEL_DET2
Figure 2-2-3 NCU PWB block diagram
V10 PC20 DB20
U11
Q47 Q48 PC40
V11
YC1
V12
Figure 2-2-4NCU PWB silk-screen diagram
2-2-5
3KH Connector YC1 Connected to the fax control PWB. Pin No. Signal A1 LINE1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A15 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B12 B13 LINE1 N.C N.C N.C GND GND GND GND GND GND +5VDC +5VDC +5VDC LINE2 LINE2 N.C N.C N.C TELSEL TELSEL2 ILOOPUP ILOOPUP2 EARTH TELOFHKn DCCONT I/O I/O I/O I I I I/O I/O I I I I I O I Voltage 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC Line signal Line signal Not used Not used Not used Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground 5 V DC supply 5 V DC supply 5 V DC supply Line signal Line signal Not used Not used Not used TELSEL signal Not used Not used Not used Ground start control signal (220-240 V specifications only) External line off-hook detection signal DC/DC converter control signal (220-240 V specifications only) Description
2-2-6

PF 700dp700js700df720fax Mensm

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

PF 700dp700js700df720fax Mensm

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

PF-700/710/PF-750 DP-700/JS-700 DF-720/DF-730 FaxSystem(M)

This page is intentionally left blank.

Safety warnings and precautions

Warning of risk of electric shock.

Warning of high temperature.

Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.

Always ground the copier.

2.Precautions for Maintenance

Remove toner completely from electronic components. ...................................................................

1-3 Maintenance Mode

1-5 Assembly and Disassembly

2-1 Mechanical construction

2-2 Electrical Parts Layout

2-3 Operation of the PWBs

NOTE: These specifications are subject to change without notice.

Figure 1-1-1 1. 2. 3. Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Left cover 3

Machine cross section

Figure 1-1-2 Machine cross section

This page is intentionally left blank.

Caution: Place the machine on a level surface.

Installing the cassette heater (option)

M4 x 8 S tight screws Cable hole

Cable of paper feeder

Cable of cassette heater

This page is intentionally left blank.

Maintenance mode (fullcolor machine)

Enter 10871087 using the numeric keys.

Maintenance mode is entered.

The maintenance item is selected.

Press the start key.

The selected maintenance item is run.

Press the stop/clear key.

Repeat the same maintenance item?

Run another maintenance item?

Maintenance mode is exited.

Maintenance mode (monochrome machine)

Press the status key.

Enter 10871087 using the numeric keys.

Maintenance mode is entered.

The maintenance item is selected.

Press the start key.

The selected maintenance item is run.

Press the stop key.

Repeat the same maintenance item?

Run another maintenance item?

Maintenance mode is exited.

Paper misfeed detection

(2) Paper misfeed detection conditions

Section Paper feed section

Jam code 12 No paper feed from cassette 3

Specified time 1828 ms

13 No paper feed from cassette 4

Change the paper.

Broken switch actuator. Defective feed switch 3.

Check visually and replace.

Check visually and replace.

Poor contact in the connector terminals.

Poor contact in the connector terminals.

Defective engine PWB. Defective paper feeder.

(6) The size of paper on the cassette 4 is not displayed correctly.

(1) No primary paper feed.

(2) Skewed paper feed.

Precautions for assembly and disassembly